Suzuki 2008 Sx4 Owners Manual

SX4SX4 SEDAN to the manual 0373bb5f-c676-ca14-75bb-ffa42487426c

2015-10-24

: Suzuki Suzuki-2008-Suzuki-Sx4-Owners-Manual-819273 suzuki-2008-suzuki-sx4-owners-manual-819273 suzuki pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 278 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Part No. 99011-80J21-03E

June, 2007

99011-80J21-03E

Printed in Japan

11.5 mm

ENGLISH

Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Suzuki Blue: Cyan 100%, Magenta 70%

OWNER’S MANUAL

Keep With Vehicle At All Times.

Contains Important Information

On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

SX4

2008

Made from 100% recycled paper,

except for cover.

See page 1-1

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

Engine oil recommendation: Automatic transaxle fluid:

Tire cold pressure:

For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the

“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

DOT3

An equivalent of DEXRON® -III.

See the “Tire Information Label” located on the

driver’s door lock pillar.

Engine oil with “Starburst” symbol

80J21-03E

This owner’s manual applies to the SX4/SX4 SEDAN series:

80JC001

NOTE: The illustrated models are examples of the SX4/SX4 SEDAN series.

SX4 SX4 SEDAN

80J21-03E

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing SUZUKI and welcome to our growing family. Your choice was a wise one; SUZUKI products are a great value

that will give you years of driving pleasure.

This Owner’s Manual was prepared to help you have a safe, enjoyable, and trouble-free experience with your SUZUKI. In it you will learn

about the vehicle’s operation, its safety features and maintenance requirements. Please read it carefully before operating your vehicle.

Afterwards, keep this Manual in the glove box for future reference.

Should you resell the vehicle, please leave this Manual with it for the next owner.

In addition to the Owner’s Manual, the other booklets provided with your SUZUKI explain the vehicle’s warranties. We recommend you

read them as well to familiarize yourself with this important information.

When planning the regular scheduled maintenance of your SUZUKI, we recommend you visit your local SUZUKI dealership. Their fac-

tory-trained technicians will provide the best possible service and use only genuine SUZUKI parts and accessories.

80J21-03E

SERVICE STATION GUIDE

1. Fuel (see section 1)

2. Engine hood (see section 5)

3. Tire changing tools (see section 5)

4. Engine oil dipstick <Yellow>

(see section 9)

5. Automatic transaxle fluid dipstick

<Red> (see section 9)

6. Engine coolant (see section 9)

7. Windshield washer fluid

(see section 9)

8. Battery (see section 9)

9. Tire pressure (see tire information

label on driver’s door lock pillar)

10. Spare tire (see section 9)

80JC025

80J21-03E

TABLE OF CONTENTS

California Proposition 65 Warning

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain product compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California to

cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION 1

BEFORE DRIVING 2

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS 3

INSTRUMENT PANEL 4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT 5

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE 6

DRIVING TIPS 7

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING 8

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 9

EMERGENCY SERVICE 10

APPEARANCE CARE 11

GENERAL INFORMATION 12

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS 13

SPECIFICATIONS 14

INDEX 15

80J21-03E

LOCATION OF WARNING

MESSAGES

Read and follow all of the warnings (labels

etc.) on your vehicle. Make sure you

understand all of them. Keep them on the

vehicle. Do not remove the messages for

any reason. If a label comes off or the

messages become difficult to be read,

have it corrected by your SUZUKI dealer.

1. Air bag warning labels

(on both sun visors)

2. Passenger seat belt warning label

3. Rear center seat belt warning label

4. Jacking warning label

5. Fuel filler cap message

6. Brake fluid cap message

7. Engine cooling fan warning label

8. Radiator cap warning label

9. Air conditioner warning label

10. Battery label

11. Compact spare tire warning label

12. Rear outboard seat belt warning label

13. Side air bag warning label

80J054

12 12

13 13

Driver Passenger

0-1

80J21-03E

FOREWORD

All information in this manual is based

on the latest product information avail-

able at the time of publication. Due to

improvements or other changes, there

may be discrepancies between informa-

tion in this manual and your vehicle.

SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION

reserves the right to make production

changes at any time, without notice and

without incurring any obligation to

make the same or similar changes to

vehicles previously built or sold.

SUZUKI MOTOR CORPORATION

believes in conservation and protection of

Earth’s natural resources.

To that end, we encourage every vehicle

owner to recycle, trade in, or properly dis-

pose of, as appropriate, used motor oil,

coolant, and other fluids, batteries and

tires.

IF YOU HAVE ANY PROBLEMS WITH

YOUR SUZUKI:

Please review the New Vehicle Warranty

Information booklet supplied with your

SUZUKI. Should you have a question or

problem regarding the warranty or service

of your vehicle, please take the following

action:

Consult the Service Manager and the

Owner of the Suzuki Automotive Dealer-

ship. Explain your problem and ask for

their assistance in resolving your problem.

The Owner of the dealership is in the very

best position to assist you as he or she is

vitally concerned with your continued satis-

faction.

If you are still in need of additional informa-

tion, or if you are dissatisfied, request that

your dealer arrange a meeting with your

District Service Manager.

If, after doing so, you still require further

assistance, and you purchased your

SUZUKI in the continental United States,

please contact the American Suzuki Cus-

tomer Relations Department by telephone

at 1-800-934-0934 or in writing at:

American Suzuki Motor Corporation

Automotive Customer Relations

3251 East Imperial Highway

Brea, CA 92821-6795

If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada

please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-

tomer Relations Department by telephone

at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in

writing at:

Suzuki Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

100 East Beaver Creek Road

Richmond Hill, On

L4B 1J6

In the event you require assistance related

to your SUZUKI, while temporarily travel-

ling in either the United States or Canada,

you may wish to contact the Suzuki Cus-

tomer Relations Department directly of the

country in which you are temporarily oper-

ating your vehicle.

Please be certain to provide us with the fol-

lowing information: the model, Vehicle

Identification Number, mileage, accesso-

ries involved, event dates, your concern,

and any other comments which you may

have. When we receive your correspon-

dence, we will be pleased to contact the

Owner of your dealership and assist in

resolving your concern.

For owners outside the continental United

States, please refer to the distributor’s

address listed in your Warranty Information

booklet.

0-2

80J21-03E

IMPORTANT

WARNING/CAUTION/NOTE

Please read this manual and follow its

instructions carefully. To emphasize spe-

cial information, the symbol and the

words WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE

have special meanings. Pay special atten-

tion to the messages highlighted by these

signal words:

NOTE:

Indicates special information to make

maintenance easier or instructions clearer.

75F135

The circle with a slash in this manual

means “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let this hap-

pen”.

MODIFICATION WARNING

WARNING

Indicates a potential hazard that

could result in death or injury.

CAUTION

Indicates a potential hazard that

could result in vehicle damage.

WARNING

Do not modify this vehicle. Modifica-

tion could adversely affect safety,

handling, performance or durability

and may violate governmental regula-

tions. In addition, damage or perfor-

mance problems resulting from

modification may not be covered

under warranty.

CAUTION

Improper installation of mobile com-

munication equipment such as cellu-

lar telephones or CB (Citizen’s Band)

radios may cause electronic interfer-

ence with your vehicle’s ignition sys-

tem, resulting in vehicle performance

problems. Consult your SUZUKI

dealer or qualified service technician

for advice on installing such mobile

communication equipment.

0-3

80J21-03E

LEAK DETECTION PUMP

NOTE:

Your vehicle has a pump to regularly check

the vehicle’s evaporative emission control

system for leaks. This check is performed

approximately five hours after the engine is

turned off. During this leak check, you may

hear a sound coming from the vehicle for

several minutes. This sound is normal and

does not indicate a malfunction.

0-4

80J21-03E

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

80J21-03E

65D394

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Fuel Recommendation ........................................................ 1-1

1-1

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

80J21-03E

Fuel Recommendation

60A004

Your vehicle requires regular unleaded

gasoline with a minimum rating of 87 pump

octane ((R + M)/2 method). In some areas,

the only fuels that are available are oxy-

genated fuels.

Oxygenated fuels which meet the mini-

mum octane requirement and the require-

ments described below may be used in

your vehicle without jeopardizing the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE:

Oxygenated fuels are fuels which contain

oxygen-carrying additives such as MTBE

or alcohol.

Gasoline Containing MTBE

Unleaded gasoline containing MTBE

(methyl tertiary butyl ether) may be used in

your vehicle if the MTBE content is not

greater than 15%. This oxygenated fuel

does not contain alcohol.

Gasoline/Ethanol blends

Blends of unleaded gasoline and ethanol

(grain alcohol), also known as gasohol,

may be used in your vehicle if the ethanol

content is not greater than 10%.

Gasoline/Methanol blends

Fuels containing 5% or less methanol

(wood alcohol) may be suitable for use in

your vehicle if they contain cosolvents and

corrosion inhibitors. Do NOT USE fuels

containing more than 5% methanol under

any circumstances. Fuel system damage

or vehicle performance problems resulting

from the use of such fuels are not the

responsibility of SUZUKI and may not be

covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Fuel Pump Labeling

In some states, pumps that dispense oxy-

genated fuels are required to be labeled for

the type and percentage of oxygenate and

whether important additives are present.

Such labels may provide enough informa-

tion for you to determine if a particular

blend of fuel meets the requirements listed

above. In other areas, pumps may not be

clearly labeled as to the content or type of

oxygenate and additives. If you are not

sure that the fuel you intend to use meets

these requirements, check with the service

station operator or the fuel supplier.

NOTE:

To help clean the air, SUZUKI recom-

mends you use the oxygenated fuels.

However, if you are not satisfied with the

driveability or fuel economy of your vehicle

when you are using an oxygenated fuel,

switch back to the regular unleaded gaso-

line.

CAUTION

Be careful not to spill fuel containing

alcohol while refueling. If fuel is

spilled on the vehicle body, wipe it up

immediately. Fuels containing alco-

hol can cause paint damage, which is

not covered under the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Fuel Recommendation: 1, 2

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

60G404

BEFORE DRIVING

Keys ...................................................................................... 2-1

Door Locks .......................................................................... 2-1

Windows .............................................................................. 2-16

Mirrors .................................................................................. 2-18

Seat Adjustment .................................................................. 2-19

Head Restraints ................................................................... 2-20

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems ........................... 2-22

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ....................... 2-40

2-1

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Keys

54G489

Your vehicle comes with a pair of identical

keys. Keep the spare key in a safe place.

One key can open all of the locks on the

vehicle.

The key identification number is stamped

on a metal tag provided with the keys.

Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose

your keys, you will need this number to

have new keys made. Write the number

below for your future reference.

Ignition Key Reminder

A buzzer sounds to remind you to remove

the ignition key if it is in the ignition switch

when the driver’s door is opened.

Door Locks

Side Door Locks

60A009

To lock a front door from outside the vehi-

cle:

• Insert the key and turn the top of the key

toward the rear of the vehicle, or

• Turn the lock knob forward, then pull and

hold the door handle as you close the

door.

To unlock a front door from outside the

vehicle, insert the key and turn the top of

the key toward the front of the vehicle.

79J021

To lock a door from inside the vehicle, turn

the lock knob forward. Turn the lock knob

rearward to unlock the door.

To lock a rear door from outside the vehi-

cle, turn the lock knob forward and close

the door. You do not need to pull and hold

the door handle as you close the door.

KEY NUMBER:

EXAMPLE WARNING

Always lock all doors when driving.

Locking the doors helps to prevent

occupants from being thrown from

the vehicle in the event of an acci-

dent. It also helps prevent unin-

tended opening of the doors.

Rear

Front

UNLOCK

LOCK

UNLOCK LOCK

EXAMPLE

Keys: 8

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-2

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Power Door Locking System

You can lock and unlock all the doors

(including the tailgate of SX4) simulta-

neously by:

• Turning the key in a front door lock, or

• Pushing the power door locking switch

located on the driver’s side or the front

passenger’s side door panel.

54G294

(when using the key)

To lock all the doors simultaneously, insert

the key in a front door lock and turn the top

of the key toward the rear of the vehicle

once.

To unlock all the doors simultaneously,

insert the key in a front door lock and turn

the top of the key toward the front of the

vehicle twice.

To unlock only one of the front doors, insert

the key in that door lock and turn the top of

the key toward the front of the vehicle

once.

Driver’s side

80J036

Front passenger’s side

80J016

(when using the power door locking

switch)

To lock or unlock all the doors simulta-

neously, depress the front or rear of the

switch (1) or (2), respectively.

LOCK

Rear

Front

UNLOCK

(1)

UNLOCK LOCK

EXAMPLE

(2)

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-3

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Keyless Start System Remote

Controller/Keyless Entry System

Transmitter

66J111

Your vehicle is equipped with either a key-

less start system remote controller (Type

A) or a keyless entry system transmitter

(Type B). The remote controller has a key-

less entry system and a keyless start sys-

tem. The transmitter has only a keyless

entry system. For details, refer to the fol-

lowing explanations.

Keyless Start System Remote

Controller (Type A)

The remote controller enables the following

operations:

• You can lock or unlock the doors by

operating the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons

on the remote controller. Refer to the

explanation in this section.

• You can lock or unlock the doors by

pushing the request switch on the door

handle. For details, refer to the explana-

tion in this section.

• You can start the engine without using

an ignition key. For details, refer to “Igni-

tion Switch” in the “STEERING COL-

UMN CONTROLS” section and “Starting

the Engine” in the “OPERATING YOUR

VEHICLE” section.

66J114

(1) “LOCK” button

(2) “UNLOCK” button

(3) “PANIC” button

“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button

(2) function

You can lock or unlock all doors (including

the tailgate of SX4) simultaneously by

operating the remote controller near the

vehicle.

• To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-

ton (1).

• To unlock the driver’s door, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once.

• To unlock other doors, wait a second or

two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)

a second time. If you “double-click” too

fast, the doors will not unlock.

When the doors are locked, the turn signal

lights will flash once.

Type A Type B

(1)

(2)

(3)

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-4

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

When the doors are unlocked:

• The turn signal lights will flash twice.

• If the interior light switch is in the middle

position, the interior light will turn on for

about 15 seconds and then fade out. If

you push in the ignition switch or insert

the key during this time, the light will

start to fade out immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after you

operate the “LOCK” button. If no door is

opened within about 30 seconds after the

“UNLOCK” button is operated, the doors

will automatically lock again.

NOTE:

• The maximum operating distance of the

remote controller is about 5 m (16 ft.),

but this can vary depending on the sur-

roundings, especially near other trans-

mitting devices such as radio towers or

CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks can not be operated with

the remote controller if the ignition switch

is in a position other than “LOCK”, or the

ignition key is inserted in the ignition

switch, or if any door is open.

If any door is open, you cannot lock the

door by operating the remote controller,

however unlock the door.

• You cannot lock the door unless all of the

door are closed completely.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,

ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-

sible for a replacement. Be sure to have

your dealer program the new remote

controller code in your vehicle’s memory

so that the old code is erased, or per-

form the programming procedure your-

self according to the instructions in this

section.

“PANIC” button (3) function

This function is to get the attention of oth-

ers.

Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than

1 second. The headlights and taillights will

blink for about 30 seconds. Also, the horn

will sound intermittently for about 30 sec-

onds at the same time.

To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press any

button (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on the

remote controller. You can also insert the

key in the ignition switch and turn to the

“ON” position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.

NOTE:

The “PANIC” button function will not acti-

vate when the key is in the ignition switch.

Keyless unlocking/locking using the

request switches

SX4

80JC054

SX4 SEDAN

56KN008

(1) EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-5

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

When the remote controller is within the

operating range described in this section,

you can lock or unlock the doors by push-

ing the request switch (1) on the door han-

dle of the driver’s door, front passenger’s

door or tailgate of SX4.

To lock all doors when all doors are

unlocked:

• Push the request switch on one of the

door handles once.

The turn signal lights will flash once when

the doors are locked.

To unlock a door or all doors:

• Push the request switch on the door

handle once to unlock only one door.

• Push the request switch on the door

handle twice to unlock all doors.

When the doors are unlocked:

• The turn signal lights will flash twice.

• If the interior light switch is in the middle

position, the interior light will turn on for

about 15 seconds and then fade out. If

you push in the ignition switch or insert

the key during this time, the light will

start to fade out immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after you

operate the request switch to lock the

doors.

NOTE:

• The door locks can not be operated by

the request switch under the following

conditions:

– If any door is open or is not completely

closed.

– If the ignition switch is in a position

other than “LOCK”.

– If the ignition key is inserted in the igni-

tion switch.

• If no doors are opened within about 30

seconds after unlocking the doors by

pushing the request switch, the doors

will be locked again automatically.

80J056

(1) 80 cm (2 1/2 feet)

When the remote controller is within

approximately 80 cm (2 1/2 feet) from a

front door handle or the tailgate switch, you

can lock or unlock the doors by pushing

the request switch.

NOTE:

• If the remote controller is outside the

request switch operating range

described above, you will not be able to

operate the request switch.

• If the battery of the remote controller

runs down or there are strong radio

waves or noise, the request switch oper-

ating range may be reduced or the

remote controller may be inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to the

door glass, the request switches may not

operate.

• If a spare remote controller is in the vehi-

cle, the request switches may not oper-

ate normally.

• The remote controller will only operate a

request switch if it is within the switch’s

operating range. For example, if the

remote controller is within the operating

range of the driver’s door request switch

but not the front passenger’s door

request switch or the tailgate request

switch, the driver’s door switch can be

operated but the front passenger’s door

switch or tailgate switch can not be oper-

ated.

(1)

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-6

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

NOTE:

The keyless start system may not function

correctly in certain environments or under

certain operating conditions such as the

following:

• When there are strong signals coming

from a television, power station or a cel-

lular phone.

• When the remote controller is in contact

with or covered by a metal object.

• When a radio wave type remote keyless

entry is used nearby.

• When the remote controller is placed

near an electronic device such as per-

sonal computer.

Some additional precautions you should

take and information you should be aware

of are:

• Make sure the ignition key is stowed in

the remote controller. If the remote con-

troller becomes unreliable, you will not

be able to lock or unlock the doors or

start the engine.

• Be sure that the driver always carries the

remote controller.

• If you lose one of the remote controllers,

ask your SUZUKI dealer as soon as pos-

sible for a replacement. Be sure to have

your dealer program the new remote

controller code in your vehicle’s memory

so that the old code is erased, or per-

form the programming procedure your-

self according to the instructions in this

section.

• You can use up to four remote controllers

and ignition keys for your vehicle. Ask

your SUZUKI dealer for details.

• The battery life of the remote controller

is about two years, but it can vary

depending on usage conditions.

80JC026

To stow the ignition key into the remote

controller, push the key in the remote con-

troller until you hear a click.

80JC027

To remove the key from the remote control-

ler, push the button (A) in the direction of

the arrow and pull the key out from the

remote controller.

CAUTION

The remote controller is a sensitive

electronic instrument. To avoid dam-

aging the remote controller:

• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such as by

leaving it on the dashboard under

direct sunlight.

• Keep the remote controller away

from magnetic objects such as a

television.

(A)

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-7

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Reminder function

80J037

If the remote controller is not in the vehicle

under the following conditions, a buzzer

sounds intermittently for about 2 seconds

and the keyless start system indicator light

on the instrument cluster blinks in red:

• When the vehicle speed is over 10 km/h

(6 mph).

• When one or more doors are opened

and all of the doors are later closed with

the ignition switch in a position other

than “LOCK”.

The red indicator light will turn off within

several seconds after the remote controller

is returned to an area of the vehicle other

than the rear luggage area.

If the remote controller is left in the vehicle

and you lock the driver’s door or front pas-

senger’s door as described below, the door

will be automatically unlocked.

• If you open the driver’s door and lock the

door by turning the lock knob forward or

pushing the power door locking switch,

the driver’s door will be automatically

unlocked.

• If you open a door other than the driver’s

door and lock the front passenger’s door

by turning the lock knob forward or push-

ing the power door locking switch, the

front passenger’s door will be automati-

cally unlocked.

For SX4 SEDAN, if you close the trunk lid

with the remote controller left in the trunk

with all the doors locked, the trunk will be

automatically unlatched.

NOTE:

• The reminder will not operate when the

remote controller is on the instrument

panel, in the glove box, in the door

pocket, in the sun visor or on the floor

etc.

• Be sure that the driver always carries the

remote controller.

• Do not leave the remote controller in the

vehicle when leaving the vehicle.

Replacement of the battery

If the remote controller becomes unreli-

able, replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the remote con-

troller:

66J016

1) Insert a flat blade screw driver covered

with a soft cloth in the slot of the remote

controller and pry it open.

EXAMPLE

Door Locks: 3, 5, 8

2-8

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

66J017

2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc

type CR2032 or equivalent) so its + ter-

minal faces the bottom of the case as

shown in the illustration.

3) Close the remote controller firmly.

4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-

ated with the remote controller.

5) Dispose of the used battery properly

according to applicable rules or regula-

tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-

ies with ordinary household trash.

Programming/erasing the remote con-

troller code yourself

Your new vehicle was originally equipped

with two remote controllers.

If you have lost one of the remote control-

lers, you should change the remote con-

troller code in your vehicle’s memory as

soon as possible for security. If you pur-

chase additional remote controllers, the

new remote controllers need to be pro-

grammed into your vehicle’s memory. You

can perform this yourself by using the fol-

lowing procedure:

NOTE:

• You can program up to four remote con-

troller codes into your vehicle’s memory.

The four codes may be the same or dif-

ferent.

• If you try to program a fifth code, the four

remote controller codes that are pro-

grammed will be cleared automatically.

• If you program a new remote controller

code, all of the old remote controller

codes that are in your vehicle’s memory

will be erased automatically. When you

program a new remote controller, you

should reprogram any additional remote

controllers at the same time.

• To purchase new remote controllers, see

your SUZUKI dealer.

• Before you begin programming, have all

of your remote controllers available.

To program a new remote controller

1) Close all the doors of the vehicle.

2) Sit in the driver’s seat and confirm that

the driver’s door is unlocked.

3) Insert the key into the ignition switch.

4) Complete steps 1 through 6 described

below within 25 seconds after step 3).

64J004

1. Push the power door locking switch

of the driver’s door to the lock posi-

tion and then push it to the unlock

position.

2. Repeat step 1 two more times.

WARNING

Swallowing a lithium battery may

cause serious internal injury. Do not

allow anyone to swallow a lithium

battery. Keep lithium batteries away

from children and pets. If swallowed,

contact a physician immediately.

(1)

CAUTION

The transmitter/remote controller is a

sensitive electronic instrument. To

avoid damaging it, do not expose it to

dust or moisture or tamper with inter-

nal parts.

UNLOCK

(2)

LOCK

(1)

Windows: 3, 8

2-9

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

3. Push the power door locking switch

of the driver’s door to the lock posi-

tion.

4. Remove the key from the ignition

switch and then insert it again.

5. Repeat step 4 three more times.

6. To start the engine, turn the ignition

switch to the “START” position.

Wait for 3 seconds.

7. Proceed to step 5) within 60 seconds

after the engine has started.

NOTE:

You cannot program the remote controller

if you don’t complete steps 1 through 6

within 25 seconds.

You cannot program the remote controller

if you do not proceed to step 5) within 60

seconds after the engine has started.

5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position.

A buzzer will sound twice and the door

lock switch will be activated from the

lock position to the unlock position

automatically.

6) Press the “LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or

“PANIC” button on the remote control-

ler.

A buzzer will sound twice and the door

lock switch will be activated from the

lock position to the unlock position

automatically.

If you want to program an additional

remote controller, repeat the procedure

of step 6) using the additional remote

controller.

NOTE:

Complete step 6) within 30 seconds.

You can program up to four remote control-

lers.

7) To complete programming, remove the

key from the ignition switch or turn the

ignition switch to the “ON” position.

8) Make sure that the keyless start system

and keyless entry system operate prop-

erly by operating each remote control-

ler.

If you cannot operate the keyless start sys-

tem and/or keyless entry system, repeat

this programming procedure again.

If you still cannot operate the systems, see

your SUZUKI dealer.

To change the old remote controller

codes in your vehicle’s memory

If you have lost one of the remote control-

lers, you should change the remote con-

troller codes in your vehicle’s memory as

soon as possible for security.

To erase the remote controller code(s) in

your vehicle’s memory, you should pro-

gram the new remote controller code. The

old codes in your vehicle’s memory will be

erased automatically. If you have more

remote controller(s), you must program all

of the remote controller codes at the same

time. You cannot operate the keyless start

system and keyless entry system using

any remote controller that is not pro-

grammed at the same time.

For details on how to program, refer to the

programming procedure in this section.

When you complete programming, make

sure that the keyless start system and key-

less entry system operate properly by

operating each remote controller.

Windows: 3, 8

2-10

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

1. For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

2. For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference,

and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the

device.

The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-

istration number only signifies that the

Industry Canada technical specifications

were met.

Keyless Entry System Transmitter

(Type B)

52D209

(1) “LOCK” button

(2) “UNLOCK” button

(3) “PANIC” button

“LOCK” button (1) / “UNLOCK” button

(2) function

You can lock or unlock all doors (including

the tailgate of SX4) simultaneously by

operating the transmitter near the vehicle.

• To lock the doors, push the “LOCK” but-

ton (1).

• To unlock the driver’s door, push the

“UNLOCK” button (2) once.

• To unlock other doors, wait a second or

two, then push the “UNLOCK” button (2)

a second time. If you “double-click” too

fast, the doors will not unlock.

When the doors are locked, the turn signal

lights will flash once.

When the doors are unlocked:

• The turn signal lights will flash twice.

• If the interior light switch is in the middle

position, the interior light will turn on for

about 15 seconds and then fade out. If

you insert the key into the ignition switch

during this time, the light will start to fade

out immediately.

Be sure the doors are locked after you

operate the “LOCK” button. If no door is

opened within about 30 seconds after the

“UNLOCK” button is operated, the doors

will automatically lock again.

NOTE:

• The maximum operating distance of the

keyless entry system transmitter is about

5 m (16 ft.), but this can vary depending

on the surroundings, especially near

other transmitting devices such as radio

towers or CB (Citizen’s Band) radios.

• The door locks can not be operated with

the transmitter, if the ignition key is

inserted in the ignition switch.

• If you lose one of the transmitters, ask

your SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible

for a replacement. Be sure to have your

dealer program the new transmitter code

in your vehicle’s memory so that the old

code is erased, or perform the program-

ming procedure yourself according to the

instructions in this section.

(1)

(2)

(3)

Windows: 3, 8

Mirrors: 3, 8

2-11

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

“PANIC” button (3) function

This function is to get the attention of oth-

ers.

Press the “PANIC” button (3) for more than

1 second. The headlights and taillights will

blink for about 30 seconds. Also, the horn

will sound intermittently for about 30 sec-

onds at the same time.

To cancel the “PANIC” mode, press any

button (PANIC, LOCK or UNLOCK) on the

transmitter. You can also insert the key in

the ignition switch and turn to the “ON”

position to cancel the “PANIC” mode.

NOTE:

The “PANIC” button function will not acti-

vate when the key is in the ignition switch.

Replacement of the battery

If the transmitter becomes unreliable,

replace the battery.

To replace the battery of the transmitter:

52D210

1) Put the edge of a coin or a flat blade

screw driver in the slot of the transmitter

and pry it open.

52D211

2) Replace the battery (1) (Lithium disc-

type CR2025 or equivalent) so its + ter-

minal faces the “+” mark of the transmit-

ter.

3) Close the transmitter firmly.

4) Make sure the door locks can be oper-

ated with the transmitter.

5) Dispose of the used battery properly

according to applicable rules or regula-

tions. Do not dispose of lithium batter-

ies with ordinary household trash.

CAUTION

The transmitter is a sensitive elec-

tronic instrument. To avoid damaging

the transmitter:

• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such as by

leaving it on the dashboard under

direct sunlight.

• Keep the transmitter away from

magnetic objects such as a televi-

sion.

WARNING

Swallowing a lithium battery may

cause serious internal injury. Do not

allow anyone to swallow a lithium

battery. Keep lithium batteries away

from children and pets. If swallowed,

contact a physician immediately.

(1)

Mirrors: 3, 8

Seat Adjustment: 3

2-12

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Programming/removing a transmitter

code yourself

Your new vehicle was originally equipped

with two transmitters.

If you have lost one of the transmitters, you

should change the transmitter code in your

vehicle’s memory as soon as possible for

security. If you purchase additional trans-

mitters, the new transmitters need to be

programmed into your vehicle’s memory.

You can perform this yourself by using the

following procedure:

NOTE:

• You can program up to three transmitter

codes into your vehicle’s memory. The

three codes may be the same or differ-

ent.

• If you try to program a fourth code, the

oldest code will be cleared automatically.

• To purchase new transmitters, see your

SUZUKI dealer.

• Before you begin programming, have all

of your transmitters available.

To program a new transmitter

1) Confirm that all the doors are closed

and the ignition key is out of the ignition

switch.

2) Open the driver’s door.

3) Insert the key, turn the ignition switch to

the “ON” position, turn the ignition

switch to the “LOCK” position and

remove the key within 10 seconds.

66J018

4) Push and release the driver’s door

switch (1) 3 times, insert the key, and

turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-

tion within 20 seconds.

5) Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”

position and remove the key within 10

seconds. All doors will lock/unlock to

confirm that this procedure has been

properly completed.

52D212

6) Press the “UNLOCK” button (2) on the

transmitter one time within 20 seconds

(after step 5). All the doors will lock/

unlock to confirm that the procedure

has been completed and the transmitter

has been programmed.

7) If you want to program an additional

transmitter, repeat the procedure from

step 1) through step 6).

8) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-

tem operates properly by operating

each transmitter.

CAUTION

The transmitter/remote controller is a

sensitive electronic instrument. To

avoid damaging it, do not expose it to

dust or moisture or tamper with inter-

nal parts.

(1)

(2)

Seat Adjustment: 3

2-13

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

To change the old transmitter codes in

your vehicle’s memory

If you have lost one of the transmitters, you

should change the transmitter codes in

your vehicle’s memory as soon as possible

for security.

To remove one of the transmitter codes

from your vehicle’s memory, first replace all

three of the transmitter codes in your vehi-

cle’s memory, then program additional

transmitters as follows:

1) Program one of your transmitters three

times, by repeating the programming

procedure shown in this section. This

will replace all the old transmitter codes

in the vehicle’s memory with the code

for the transmitter you are using.

2) If you want to program up to two addi-

tional transmitters, repeat the program-

ming procedure shown in this section.

3) Make sure that the keyless entry sys-

tem operates properly by operating

each transmitter.

1. For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

2. For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

Standard RSS-210. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

1) This device may not cause interference,

and

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the

device.

The term “IC:” before the certification/reg-

istration number only signifies that the

Industry Canada technical specifications

were met.

Child Lock System (rear doors)

80J091

Each of the rear doors is equipped with a

child lock which can be used to help pre-

vent unwanted opening of the door from

inside the vehicle. When the lock lever is in

the “LOCK” position (1), the rear door can

only be opened from outside. When the

lock lever is in the “UNLOCK” position (2),

the rear door can be opened from inside or

outside.

WARNING

Be sure to place the child lock in the

“LOCK” position whenever children

are seated in the rear.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

Seat Adjustment: 3

Head Restraints: 3

2-14

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Tailgate (SX4)

80JC059

(1) Tailgate unlatch switch

You can lock and unlock the tailgate by

using the key in the driver’s door lock.

To open the tailgate, push and hold the tail-

gate unlatch switch (1) and lift the tailgate.

NOTE:

When the tailgate is closed incompletely,

follow the procedure below:

1) Push the tailgate unlatch switch (1) and

open the tailgate a little.

2) After a few seconds, close the tailgate.

3) Make sure that the tailgate is closed

completely.

If you can not unlatch the tailgate by push-

ing the unlatch switch (1) due to a dis-

charged battery or malfunction, follow the

procedures below to unlatch the tailgate

from inside the vehicle.

1) Fold the rear seat forward for easier

access. Refer to “Folding Rear Seats”

section for details on how to fold the

rear seat forward.

80J092

2) Push open the tailgate from inside by

pushing up on the emergency lever (2)

using a flat blade screw driver or the

jack handle. The tailgate will be latched

again by closing the tailgate simply.

If the tailgate can not be unlatched by

pushing the unlatch switch (1), have the

vehicle inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Always make sure that the tailgate is

closed and latched securely. Com-

pletely closing the tailgate helps pre-

vent occupants from being thrown

from the vehicle in the event of an

accident. Completely closing it also

helps keep exhaust gases from enter-

ing the car.

WARNING

• To avoid injury, do not use your fin-

ger to push the emergency lever.

• Make sure there is not anyone near

the tailgate when pushing open the

tailgate from inside the vehicle.

(2)

Head Restraints: 3

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-15

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Trunk Lid (SX4 SEDAN)

55KS005

If your vehicle is equipped with a trunk lid

key lock, you can open the trunk lid by

using the key in the trunk lid lock. To open

the trunk lid, insert the key and turn it

clockwise to unlatch and lift the trunk lid.

56KN010

If your vehicle is equipped with a trunk lid

unlatch switch (1), push and hold the trunk

lid unlatch switch (1) and lift the trunk lid to

open the trunk lid.

The trunk lid unlatch switch (1) operates

when the keyless start system remote con-

troller is within the switch’s operating

range.

The trunk lid unlatch switch (1) operates

only to open the trunk lid.

If you close the trunk lid with the keyless

start system remote controller left in the

trunk with all the doors locked, the trunk

will be automatically unlatched.

80JC005

You can unlock the lid by pulling the

release lever located to the outboard side

of the driver’s seat.

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Always make sure that the trunk lid is

closed and latched securely. Other-

wise, it may open unexpectedly while

driving. Completely closing it also

helps keep exhaust gases from enter-

ing the car.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-16

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Internal Trunk Release

(SX4 SEDAN)

54G297

There is a release lever located inside the

trunk, on the rear part of the trunk lid. This

lever is for emergency use so that if a per-

son, such as a child, gets trapped in the

trunk compartment, he can exit the vehicle.

The lever glows in the dark, after a brief

exposure to ambient light, so it can be

found easily. It is operated by pushing it

down in the direction of the arrow.

Windows

Power Window Controls

Driver’s side

79J028

The power windows can only be operated

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-

tion.

The driver’s door has switches (1), (2), (4),

(5), to operate the driver’s window, the

front passenger’s window, the rear left win-

dow and the rear right window, respec-

tively.

Passenger’s door

80J018

The passenger’s door only has a switch to

operate the passenger’s window (3).

WARNING

To help avoid situations where some-

one might get trapped in the trunk,

keep your vehicle locked when unat-

tended, and do not allow anyone to

play in the trunk.

(1)

(2)

(4)

(5)

EXAMPLE

(3)

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-17

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

81A009

To open a window, push the top part of the

switch and to close a window lift up the top

part of the switch.

The driver’s window has an auto-down fea-

ture for added convenience (at toll booths

or drive-through restaurants, for example).

This means you can open the window with-

out holding the window switch in the

“Down” position. Press the driver’s window

switch completely down and release it. To

stop the window before it reaches the bot-

tom, pull the switch up briefly.

79J031

The driver’s door also has a lock switch for

the passenger’s window. When you push in

the lock switch, the passenger’s window

can not be raised or lowered by operating

any of the switches (2), (3), (4) or (5). To

restore normal operation, release the lock

switch by pushing the switch again.

OPEN

WARNING

• You should always lock the passen-

ger’s window operation when there

are children in the vehicle. Children

can be seriously injured if they get

part of their body caught by the

window during operation.

(Continued)

EXAMPLE WARNING

(Continued)

• To avoid injuring an occupant by

window entrapment, be sure no

part of the occupant’s body such

as hands or head is in the path of

the electric windows when closing

them.

• Always remove the ignition key

when leaving the vehicle even if a

short time. Also do not leave chil-

dren alone in a parked vehicle.

Unattended children could use the

electric window switches and get

trapped by the window.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-18

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

52LM012

NOTE:

The rear door windows are not designed to

open fully. They can be opened about 2/3

of the way down.

NOTE:

If you drive with one of the rear windows

open, you may hear a loud sound caused

by air vibration. To reduce the sound, open

the driver’s or front passenger’s window, or

narrow the rear window opening.

Mirrors

Inside Rearview Mirror

65D410

65D409

You can adjust the inside rearview mirror

by hand so as to see the rear of your vehi-

cle in the mirror. To adjust the mirror, set

the selector tab (1) to the day position,

then move the mirror up, down or sideways

by hand to obtain the best view.

When driving at night, you can move the

selector tab to the night position to reduce

glare from the headlights of vehicles

behind you.

EXAMPLE

(1)

Day driving Night driving

WARNING

• Always adjust the mirror with the

selector set to the day position.

• Only use the night position if it is

necessary to reduce glare from the

headlights of vehicles behind you.

Be aware that in this position you

may not be able to see some

objects that could be seen in the

day position.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-19

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Outside Rearview Mirrors

79J033

Adjust the outside rearview mirrors so you

can just see the side of your vehicle in the

mirrors.

The passenger’s side mirror is a convex

(curved surface) mirror. Objects seen in

this mirror will look smaller and appear far-

ther away than when seen in a flat mirror.

Power Mirror Control (if equipped)

79J034

The switch to control the power rearview

mirrors is located on the driver’s door

panel. You can adjust the mirrors when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion. To adjust the mirrors:

1) Move the selector switch to the left or

right to select the mirror you wish to

adjust.

2) Press the outer part of the switch that

corresponds to the direction you wish to

move the mirror.

3) Return the selector switch to the center

position to help prevent unintended

adjustment.

Seat Adjustment

WARNING

Be careful when judging the size or

distance of a vehicle or other object

seen in the side convex mirror. Be

aware that objects look smaller and

appear farther away than when seen

in a flat mirror.

(2)

(4)

(3)

(1) (1)

(3)(2)

(4)

WARNING

Never attempt to adjust the driver’s

seat or seatback while driving. The

seat or seatback could move unex-

pectedly, causing loss of control.

Make sure that the driver’s seat and

seatback are properly adjusted

before you start driving.

WARNING

To avoid excessive seat belt slack,

which reduces the effectiveness of

the seat belts as a safety device,

make sure that the seats are adjusted

before the seat belts are fastened.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-20

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Adjusting Seat Position

Front seat

80J093

The adjustment lever for each front seat is

located under the front of the seat. To

adjust the seat position, pull up on the

adjustment lever and slide the seat forward

or rearward. After adjustment, try to move

the seat forward and rearward to ensure

that it is securely latched.

Adjusting Seatbacks

Front seat

80J094

To adjust the seatback angle of front seats,

pull up the lever on the outboard side of

the seat, move the seatback to the desired

position, and release the lever to lock the

seatback in place. After adjustment, try

moving the seatback to make sure it is

securely locked.

Head Restraints

80J001

Head restraints are designed to help

reduce the risk of neck injuries in case of

an accident.

Adjust the head restraint to the position

which places the center of the head

restraint closest to the top of your ears. If

this is not possible for very tall passengers,

adjust the head restraint as high as possi-

ble.

WARNING

All seatbacks should always be in an

upright position when driving, or seat

belt effectiveness may be reduced.

Seat belts are designed to offer maxi-

mum protection when seatbacks are

in the upright position.

WARNING

• Never drive the vehicle with the

head restraints removed.

• Do not attempt to adjust the head

restraint while driving.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-21

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Front

66J150

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on

the restraint until it clicks. To lower the

restraint, push down on the restraint while

holding in the release knob (1). If a head

restraint must be removed (for cleaning,

replacement, etc.), use the following pro-

cedure.

1) Insert a sharp-pointed tool into the

small hole (2). Push the tip into the hole

(2) and hold it while pushing in the

release knob (1).

2) Pull the head restraint all the way out

while pushing the release knob (1) and

holding the tip in the hole (2).

NOTE:

It may be necessary to recline the seat-

back to provide enough overhead clear-

ance to remove the head restraint.

66J161

To reinstall the head restraint, insert the

head restraint bars into the holes (2) and

push the head restraint down.

Rear

64J023

To raise the rear head restraint, pull

upward on the restraint until it clicks. To

lower the restraint, push down on the

restraint while holding in the release knob.

If a head restraint must be removed (for

cleaning, replacement, etc.), push in the

release knob and pull the head restraint all

the way out.

When installing a child restraint system,

raise the head restraint to the most upper

position.

For SX4 SEDAN, if the distance between

the child restraint system and the anchor

bracket is too close to properly tighten the

child restraint top strap, lower the head

restraint to the lowest position and connect

the top strap to the anchor bracket by

passing it over the top of the head

restraint.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

PUSH

(2)

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-22

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

NOTE:

It may be necessary to recline the seat-

back to provide enough overhead clear-

ance to remove the head restraint.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint

Systems

65D231

65D606

WARNING

An air bag supplements, or adds to,

the frontal crash protection offered

by seat belts. The driver and all pas-

sengers must be properly restrained

by wearing seat belts at all times,

whether or not an air bag is mounted

at their seating position, to minimize

the risk of severe injury or death in

the event of a crash.

WARNING

• Never allow persons to ride in the

cargo area of a vehicle. In the event

of an accident, there is a much

greater risk of injury for persons

who are not riding in a seat with

their seat belt securely fastened.

• Seat belts should always be

adjusted as follows:

– the lap portion of the belt should

be worn low across the pelvis,

not across the waist.

– the shoulder straps should be

worn on the outside shoulder

only, and never under the arm.

– the shoulder straps should be

away from your face and neck,

but not falling off your shoulder.

(Continued)

Above the pelvis

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-23

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

65D201 65D199

WARNING

(Continued)

• Seat belts should never be worn

with the straps twisted and should

be adjusted as tightly as is com-

fortable to provide the protection

for which they have been designed.

A slack belt will provide less pro-

tection than one which is snug.

(Continued)

Across the pelvis

WARNING

(Continued)

• Pregnant women should use seat

belts, although specific recommen-

dations about driving should be

made by the woman’s medical advi-

sor. Remember that the lap portion

of the belt should be worn as low

as possible across the hips, as

shown in the diagram.

• Make sure that each seat belt

buckle is inserted into the proper

buckle catch. It is possible to cross

the buckles in the rear seat.

(Continued)

as low as possible

across the hips

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not wear your seat belt over

hard or breakable objects in your

pockets or on your clothing. If an

accident occurs, objects such as

glasses, pens, etc. under the seat

belt can cause injury.

• Never use the same seat belt on

more than one occupant and never

attach a seat belt over an infant or

child being held on an occupant’s

lap. Such seat belt use could cause

serious injury in the event of an

accident.

• Periodically inspect seat belt

assemblies for excessive wear and

damage. Seat belts should be

replaced if webbing becomes

frayed, contaminated, or damaged

in any way. It is essential to replace

the entire seat belt assembly after it

has been worn in a severe impact,

even if damage to the assembly is

not obvious.

• Children age 12 and under should

ride properly restrained in the rear

seat, if equipped.

(Continued)

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-24

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Lap-Shoulder Belt

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

The seat belt has an emergency locking

retractor (ELR), which is designed to lock

the seat belt only during a sudden stop or

impact. It also may lock if you pull the belt

across your body very quickly. If this hap-

pens, let the belt go back to unlock it, then

pull the belt across your body more slowly.

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The front passenger’s seat belt and the

rear seat belts have emergency locking

retractors (ELRs) that can be temporarily

converted to function as automatic locking

retractors (ALRs). The ALR mode should

be used if you need to secure a child

restraint system in the seat. Refer to the

“Child Restraint Systems” section for

details.

Safety reminder

60A038

60A040

To reduce the risk of sliding under the belt

during a collision, position the lap portion

of the belt across your lap as low on your

hips as possible and adjust it to a snug fit

WARNING

(Continued)

• Infants and small children should

never be transported unless they

are properly restrained. Restraint

systems for infants and small chil-

dren can be purchased commer-

cially and should be used. Make

sure that the system you purchase

meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards. Read and follow all the

directions provided by the manu-

facturer.

• Avoid contamination of seat belt

webbing by polishes, oils, chemi-

cals and particularly battery acid.

Cleaning may safely be carried out

using mild soap and water.

• For children, if the shoulder belt

irritates the neck or face, move the

child closer to the center of the

vehicle.

• All seatbacks should always be in

an upright position when driving,

or seat belt effectiveness may be

reduced. Seat belts are designed to

offer maximum protection when

seatbacks are in the upright posi-

tion.

Sit up straight and

fully back

Low on hips

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-25

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

by pulling the shoulder portion of the belt

upward through the latch plate. The length

of the diagonal shoulder strap adjusts itself

to allow freedom of movement.

All Seat Belts

60A036

To fasten the seat belt, sit up straight and

well back in the seat, pull the latch plate

attached to the seat belt across your body

and press it into the buckle until you hear a

“click”.

80J019

NOTE:

The word “CENTER” is molded into the

buckle for the rear center belt. The buckles

are designed so a latch plate can not be

inserted into the wrong buckle.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-26

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

60A039

To unfasten the belt, push the red

“PRESS” button on the buckle and allow

the belt to retract.

Seat Belt Reminder

Driver’s seat belt reminder light

80J020

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

80J021

When the driver and front passenger don’t

buckle their seat belts, the driver’s seat belt

reminder light in the instrument cluster and

the front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light in the information display will come on

and a buzzer will sound as a reminder to

the driver and front passenger to buckle

their seat belts.

The seat belt reminder functions as shown

in the figure below. There are some differ-

ences between the driver’s seat belt

reminder and the front passenger’s seat

belt reminder. For more details, refer to the

explanation below.

WARNING

It is absolutely essential that the

driver and passengers wear their seat

belts at all times. Persons who are

not wearing seat belts have a much

greater risk of injury if an accident

occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-

ling your seat belt before putting the

key in the ignition.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-27

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Flow chart

52D219

Reminder 1 – 3

For each reminder 1 – 3, the reminder light comes on for about 20 seconds, then blinks for

about 55 seconds. When the reminder light first comes on, a buzzer sounds intermittently

for about 6 seconds.

Ignition Switch “ON”

Seat belt is

buckled

30 sec.

Vehicle speed:

increase to 8 km/h

Seat belt is

unbuckled

Vehicle speed:

below 8 km/h

Vehicle speed:

over 8 km/h

Reminder 3

3 min.

No reminder

Seat belt is

unbuckled

Vehicle speed:

below 8 km/h

Vehicle speed:

over 8 km/h

No reminder

Reminder 2

Reminder 1

Driver’s seat belt reminder

If the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled

with the ignition key in the “ON” position,

the driver’s seat belt reminder works as fol-

lows:

1) The driver’s seat belt reminder light will

come on for about 20 seconds when

the ignition key is turned to the “ON”

position then will blink for about 55 sec-

onds. When the light comes on, a

buzzer will also sound intermittently for

about 6 seconds (Reminder 1).

2) If the vehicle is driven (vehicle speed >

8 km/h), Reminder 2 will operate about

30 seconds after Reminder 1 has fin-

ished.

If the vehicle is not driven (vehicle

speed < 8 km/h), Reminder 2 will oper-

ate when driving starts (vehicle speed >

8 km/h).

3) Reminder 3 will operate about 3 min-

utes after Reminder 2 has finished.

4) Even if the driver’s seat belt remains

unbuckled after Reminder 3, there will

be no further reminders.

If the driver has buckled his or her seat belt

and later unbuckles the seat belt, the

reminder system will be activated from

Reminder 1 or Reminder 2 according to

the vehicle speed. (Refer to the flow chart.)

The driver’s seat belt reminder will be auto-

matically canceled when the driver’s seat

belt is buckled or the ignition switch is

turned off.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-28

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

The front passenger’s seat belt reminder

will activate only when there is a passen-

ger sitting in the front seat. In some situa-

tions, however, such as when you place

heavy objects in the front seat, the seat

belt reminder can be activated as if there

were a passenger present. The front pas-

senger’s seat belt reminder works in the

same manner as the driver’s seat belt

reminder, except that it is not activated

until 10 seconds after the ignition switch is

turned to the “ON” position.

Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster

64J198

Adjust the shoulder anchor height so that

the shoulder belt rides on the center of the

outside shoulder. To adjust the shoulder

anchor height, slide the anchor up or down

while pulling the lock knob out. After

adjustment, make sure that the anchor is

securely locked.

Seat Belt Hanger (if equipped)

SX4

79J035

WARNING

Be sure that the shoulder belt is posi-

tioned on the center of the outside

shoulder. The belt should be away

from your face and neck, but not fall-

ing off your shoulder. Misadjustment

of the belt could reduce the effective-

ness of the safety belt in a crash.

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

When you move a seatback, make

sure the belt webbing is hooked in

the seat belt hangers so the seat

belts are not caught by the seatback,

seat hinge, or seat latch. This helps

prevent damage to the belt system.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-29

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Seat Belt Inspection

65D209S

Periodically inspect the seat belts to make

sure they work properly and are not dam-

aged. Check the webbing, buckles, latch

plates, retractors, anchorages and guide

loops. Replace any seat belts which do not

work properly or are damaged.

Child Restraint Systems

60G332

Infant restraint - rear seat only

65D202

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Be sure to inspect all seat belt

assemblies after any collision. Any

seat belt assembly which was in use

during a collision (other than a very

minor one) should be replaced, even

if damage to the assembly is not

obvious. Any seat belt assembly

which was not in use during a colli-

sion should be replaced if it does not

function properly, it is damaged in

any way or the seat belt pretension-

ers were activated.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-30

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Infant restraint - rear seat only

80JC007

Booster seat

80JC008

SUZUKI highly recommends that you use

a child restraint system to restrain infants

and small children. Many different types of

child restraint systems are available; make

sure that the restraint system you select

meets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dards.

All child restraint systems are designed to

be secured in vehicle seats by either seat

belts (lap belts or the lap portion of lap-

shoulder belts) or by special rigid lower

anchor bars built into the seats. Whenever

possible, SUZUKI recommends that child

restraint systems be installed on the rear

seat. According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly restrained in

rear seating positions than in front seating

positions.

If you must use a front-facing child restraint

in the front passenger’s seat, be sure to

move the front passenger’s seat as far

back as possible.

65D607

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Do not install a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger’s

seat. If the passenger’s air bag

inflates, a child in a rear-facing child

restraint could be killed or seriously

injured. The back of a rear-facing

child restraint would be too close to

the inflating air bag.

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-31

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

65D608

65D609

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat

Belts (child restraint with no top

strap)

83E031

Install your child restraint system accord-

ing to the instructions provided by the child

restraint system manufacturer. If you install

the child restraint system in the front seat,

be sure to slide the seat to the rearmost

position. After making sure that the seat

belt is securely latched:

WARNING

Children could be endangered in a

crash if their child restraints are not

properly secured in the vehicle.

When installing a child restraint sys-

tem, be sure to follow the instruc-

tions below. Be sure to secure the

child in the restraint system accord-

ing to the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-32

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

83E035

1) Pull all of the remaining webbing out of

the retractor. You will hear a click, which

means that the emergency locking

retractor (ELR) has converted to func-

tion as an automatic locking retractor

(ALR).

83E032

2) Allow the extra webbing to retract, and

pull the webbing toward the retractor to

take up any slack. Make sure that the

lap portion of the belt is tight around the

child restraint system and the shoulder

portion of the belt is positioned so that it

can not interfere with the child’s head or

neck.

83E036

3) Make sure that the retractor has con-

verted to the ALR mode by trying to pull

webbing out of the retractor. If the

retractor is in the ALR mode, the belt

will be locked.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

WARNING

If the retractor is not in the ALR

mode, the child restraint system can

move or tip over when your vehicle

turns or stops abruptly.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-33

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

65D234

65D235

4) Try moving the child restraint system in

all directions, to make sure it is securely

installed. If you need to tighten the belt,

pull more webbing toward the retractor.

To revert from ALR to ELR

65D267

When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow

it to retract to a certain length, the retractor

will automatically revert back to the normal

ELR mode.

WARNING

Before installing a child restraint in

the rear center seat, follow these

steps for secure installation:

• Make sure the detachable connec-

tor is securely latched and the web-

bing is not twisted.

• Make sure the seat belt is passed

through the seat belt guide.

EXAMPLE

Move to check

EXAMPLE

Pull to tighten

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-34

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Installation with the LATCH System

65D337

79J058

Your vehicle is equipped with lower

anchors for securing up to one or two stan-

dard LATCH-type child restraint(s) in the

second row seats. (LATCH stands for

Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children.)

The anchors are located where the rear of

the seat cushion meets the bottom of the

seatback.

SX4 SEDAN

80JC028

For SX4 SEDAN, the covers marked with

the child restraint symbol as shown in the

illustration indicate the presence of lower

anchors. Remove the covers before install-

ing the child restraint system. Cover the

lower anchors when not in use.

Install the LATCH-type child restraint sys-

tem according to the instructions provided

by the child restraint system manufacturer.

After installing, try moving the child

restraint system in all directions, especially

forward, to make sure the flexible straps or

rigid connecting bars are securely latched

to the anchors.

NOTE:

Although there are three second row seat-

ing positions, you cannot install three

LATCH type child restraints in the second

row seats. You can install one or two

LATCH restraint(s). Be sure to install the

LATCH type child restraint(s) in the out-

board seating positions.

If your LATCH restraint has flexible lower

connecting straps, these general instruc-

tions apply:

1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward

for easier installation.

73K017

2) Place the child restraint in the second

row seat, feeding the strap hooks

through the slots in the seat cushion or

the slots in the seatback bottom.

Rigid lower connecting

bar type

Flexible lower connecting

strap type

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-35

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

65D340

3) Snap the strap hooks to the anchors.

Take care not to pinch your fingers.

65D341

4) Return the seatback to the normal,

upright position. Tighten the lower

straps as described in the child restraint

owner’s manual. Attach the top tether

strap, if applicable.

65D342

5) Make sure the child restraint is securely

fastened by trying to move the child

restraint system in all directions, espe-

cially forward.

If your LATCH restraint has rigid lower con-

necting bars, these general instructions

apply:

1) If possible, fold the seatback rearward

for easier installation.

78F114

2) Place the child restraint in the second

row seat, inserting the connecting bars

through the slots in the seat cushion or

the slots in the seatback bottom.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

The seatback should always be

securely latched in a fairly upright

position when any type of child seat

is installed. An unlatched or reclined

seatback will reduce the intended

effectiveness of the child restraint

system.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

2-36

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

54G183

3) Use your hands to carefully align the

connecting bar tips with the anchors.

Take care not to pinch your fingers.

54G184

4) Push the child restraint toward the

anchors so that the connecting bar tips

are partially hooked to the anchors.

Use your hands to confirm the position.

54G185

5) Grasp the front of the child restraint and

push the child restraint forcefully to

latch the connecting bars. Make sure

they are securely latched by trying to

move the child restraint system in all

directions, especially forward.

6) Return the seatback if folded. Attach

the top tether strap, if applicable.

EXAMPLE EXAMPLE

WARNING

The seatback should always be

securely latched in a fairly upright

position when any type of child seat

is installed. An unlatched or reclined

seatback will reduce the intended

effectiveness of the child restraint

system.

EXAMPLE

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems: 3

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-37

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Installation of Child Restraint with

Top Strap

SX4

63J021

SX4 SEDAN

56KN015

Some child restraint systems require the

use of a top strap. Top strap anchor brack-

ets are provided in your vehicle at the loca-

tions shown in the illustrations. Install the

child restraint system as follows:

1) For SX4, remove the luggage compart-

ment cover.

2) Secure the child restraint on rear seat

using the procedure described above

for securing a restraint system that

does not require a top strap.

3) For SX4 SEDAN, open the cover that is

marked with the anchor bracket symbol

to access the anchor bracket. Close the

cover when not using the anchor

bracket.

4) Hook the top strap to the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap

according to the instructions provided

by the child restraint system manufac-

turer. Be sure to attach the top strap to

the corresponding anchor located

directly behind the child restraint. Do

not attach the top strap to the luggage

restraint loops (if equipped).

80JC029

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Do not attach the child restraint top

strap to the luggage restraint loops

(if equipped). Incorrectly attached top

strap will reduce the intended effec-

tiveness of the child restraint system.

Type 2

Type 1

Type 3

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-38

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

5) When routing the top strap, be sure to

pass the top strap as shown in the illus-

tration. For SX4 SEDAN, if the top strap

can not be properly tightened when

passed under the head restraint as

shown in the Type 1 and Type 2 illustra-

tions, pass the top strap over the top of

the head restraint as shown in the Type

3 illustration. (Refer to “Head

Restraints” section for details on how to

raise or lower the head restraint.)

6) Make sure that cargo does not interfere

with routing of the top strap.

Seat Belt Extender

65D613

(1) Center of body

(2) Less than 152 mm (6 inches)

(3) Open end of extender buckle

If a seat belt cannot be fastened securely

because it is not long enough, see your

authorized SUZUKI dealer for a seat belt

extender. Seat belt extenders are available

for each seating position except for the

rear center position. After inspecting the

relationship between the seat belt length,

the occupant’s body size, and the seat

adjustment (the driver’s seat should always

be adjusted as far back as possible while

still maintaining control of the vehicle, and

other adjustable seats should be adjusted

as far back as possible), your dealer can

select the appropriate seat belt extender.

• A seat belt extender should only be used

for the person, vehicle and seating loca-

tion it was provided for.

• When using the extender, ensure that

both ends are latched securely. Do not

use the extender if the open end of the

extender’s buckle is within 152 mm (6

inches) of the center of the occupant’s

body (See diagram). Use of the extender

when the buckle is too close to the cen-

ter of the body could increase the risk of

abdominal injury in the event of an acci-

dent, and could cause the shoulder belt

to be positioned incorrectly.

• Make sure to use the correct buckle cor-

responding to your seating position.

• Seat belt extenders are not intended for

use by pregnant women, and should

only be used upon approval by their

medical advisors.

• Remove and stow the extender when it

is not being used.

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-39

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Seat Belt Pretensioner System

(for front seat belt only)

52D011

Your vehicle is equipped with a seat belt

pretensioner system at the front seating

positions. You can use the pretensioner

seat belts in the same manner as ordinary

seat belts.

The seat belt pretensioner system works

with the SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT

SYSTEM (advanced air bags). The crash

sensors and the electronic controller of the

air bag system also control the seat belt

pretensioners. The pretensioners are trig-

gered only when there is a frontal crash

severe enough to trigger the front air bags

and the seat belts are fastened. If the seat

belts are not fastened, the respective pre-

tensioner system will not be activated. For

precautions and general information

including servicing the pretensioner sys-

tem, refer to the “Supplemental Restraint

System (air bags)” section in addition to

this “Seat Belt Pretensioner System” sec-

tion, and follow all those precautions.

The pretensioner is located in each front

seat belt retractor. The pretensioner tight-

ens the seat belt so the belt fits the occu-

pant’s body more snugly in the event of a

frontal crash. The retractors will remain

locked after the pretensioners are acti-

vated. Upon activation, some noise will

occur and some smoke may be released.

These conditions are not harmful and do

not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

WARNING

Failure to follow these instructions

may increase the risk of injury in a

crash.

• Only use an extender for the per-

son, vehicle and seating position it

was provided for.

• Do not use if open end of

extender’s buckle is within 152 mm

(6 inches) of center of occupant’s

body (See diagram).

• Remove and stow the extender

when it is not being used.

WARNING

This section of the owner’s manual

describes your SUZUKI’s SEAT BELT

PRETENSIONER SYSTEM. Please

read and follow ALL these instruc-

tions carefully to minimize your risk

of severe injury or death.

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-40

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

The driver and all passengers must be

properly restrained by wearing seat belts

at all times, whether or not a pretensioner

is equipped at their seating position, to

minimize the risk of severe injury or death

in the event of a crash. Sit fully back in the

seat; sit up straight; do not lean forward or

sideways. Adjust the belt so the lap portion

of the belt is worn low across the pelvis,

not across the waist. Please refer to the

“Seat Adjustment” section and the instruc-

tions and precautions about the seat belts

in this “Seat Belts and Child Restraint Sys-

tems” section for details on proper seat

and seat belt adjustments.

Please note that the pretensioners along

with the front air bags will activate only in

severe frontal collisions. They are not

designed to activate in rear impacts, side

impacts, rollovers or minor frontal colli-

sions. The pretensioners can be activated

only once. If the pretensioners are acti-

vated (that is, if the front air bags are acti-

vated), have the pretensioner system

serviced by an authorized SUZUKI dealer

as soon as possible.

If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus-

ter does not blink or come on briefly when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, stays on for more than 10 sec-

onds, or comes on while driving, the pre-

tensioner system or the air bag system

may not work properly. Have both systems

inspected by an authorized SUZUKI dealer

as soon as possible.

Service on or around the pretensioner sys-

tem components or wiring must be per-

formed only by an authorized SUZUKI

dealer who is specially trained. Improper

service could result in unintended activa-

tion of pretensioners or could render the

pretensioner inoperative. Either of these

two conditions may result in personal

injury.

To prevent damage or unintended activa-

tion of the pretensioners, be sure the bat-

tery is disconnected and the ignition switch

has been in the “LOCK” position for at least

90 seconds before performing any electri-

cal service work on your SUZUKI. Do not

touch pretensioner system components or

wiring. The wires are wrapped with yellow

tape or yellow tubing, and the couplers are

yellow. When scrapping your SUZUKI, ask

your SUZUKI dealer, body repair shop or

scrap yard for assistance.

Supplemental Restraint

System (air bags)

54G022

Your vehicle has advanced front air bags

and side air bags for the driver and right

front passenger. Your vehicle also has side

curtain air bags.

WARNING

This section of the owner’s manual

describes the protection provided by

your SUZUKI’s SUPPLEMENTAL

RESTRAINT SYSTEM (air bags).

Please read and follow ALL these

instructions carefully to minimize

your risk of severe injury or death in

the event of a collision.

EXAMPLE

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-41

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

80JC030

EXAMPLE

80JC009

Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple-

mental Restraint System consisting of the

following components in addition to a lap-

shoulder belt at each front seating position.

1. Driver’s front air bag

2. Front passenger’s front air bag

3. Seat belt pretensioners

4. Air bag controller

5. Driver’s seat position sensors

6. Occupant classification module

7. “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator

8. Forward crash sensors

9. Side air bags

10.Side curtain air bags

11.Side crash sensors

12.Front passenger’s sensor mat

13.Seat belt buckle sensors

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-42

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

63J030

If the AIR BAG light on the instrument clus-

ter does not blink when the ignition switch

is first turned to the “ON” position, or the

AIR BAG light stays on, or comes on while

driving, the air bag system (or the seat belt

pretensioner system) may not work prop-

erly. Have the air bag system inspected by

an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as

possible.

Front Air Bags

80JS026

79J059

The driver’s front air bag is located behind

the center pad of the steering wheel. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the

air bag cover to identify the location of the

air bag. The front passenger’s front air bag

is located behind the passenger’s side of

the dashboard. The words “SRS AIRBAG”

are molded into the air bag cover to identify

the location of the air bag.

Frontal collision range

60G032

Front air bags are designed to inflate only

in severe frontal collisions.

EXAMPLE

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-43

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Front air bags will not inflate

65D236

Front air bags will probably not inflate

65D237

They are not designed to inflate in rear

impacts, side impacts, rollovers or minor

frontal collisions, since they would offer no

protection in those types of accidents.

Remember, since air bags deploy only one

time during an accident, seat belts are

needed to restrain occupants from further

movements during the accident.

Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute

for seat belts. To maximize your protection,

ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be

aware that no system can prevent all pos-

sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

Your vehicle has “dual stage” front air

bags, which adjust the air bag inflation

force according to crash severity, driver’s

seat fore/aft position and whether or not

the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.

Also, your vehicle has a front passenger

sensing system, which turns off the front

passenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-

tensioner under certain conditions.

Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air

Bags

62J114

77J052

WARNING

An air bag supplements, or adds to,

the crash protection offered by seat

belts. The driver and all passengers

must be properly restrained by wear-

ing seat belts at all times, whether or

not air bags are mounted at their

seating position, to minimize the risk

of severe injury or death in the event

of a crash.

EXAMPLE

Supplemental Restraint System (advanced air bags):

3, 9, 12

2-44

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Side air bags are located in the part of the

front seatbacks closest to the doors. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” are molded into the

side air bag cover to identify the location of

the side air bags.

64J034

Side curtain air bags are located in the roof

lining. The words “SRS AIRBAG” are

molded into the pillar to identify the loca-

tion of the side curtain air bags.

Side collision range

64J036

Side air bags and side curtain air bags

will not inflate

54G027

Side air bags and side curtain air bags

will probably not inflate

54G028

Side air bags and side curtain air bags are

designed to inflate only in severe side

impact collisions. They are not designed to

inflate in frontal or rear collisions, rollovers

or minor side collisions, since they would

offer no protection in those types of acci-

dents. Only the side air bag and side cur-

tain air bag on the side of the vehicle that

is struck will inflate. Remember, since an

air bag deploys only one time during an

accident, seat belts are needed to restrain

occupants from further movements during

the accident.

Therefore, an air bag is NOT a substitute

for seat belts. To maximize your protection,

ALWAYS WEAR YOUR SEAT BELTS. Be

aware that no system can prevent all pos-

sible injuries that may occur in an accident.

2-45

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

The driver’s seat is equipped with a seat

position sensor to monitor the driver seat

fore/aft position. The seat position sensor

provides information which is used to

judge if the driver’s front air bag should

deploy at reduced power or at full power.

When the seat position sensor has a prob-

lem, the AIR BAG light on the instrument

cluster will turn on. If this happens, deploy-

ment of the driver’s front air bag will not

include consideration of seat fore/aft posi-

tion. Have the air bag system inspected by

an authorized SUZUKI dealer as soon as

possible.

Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Buckle

Sensor

The front passenger’s seat belt buckle is

equipped with a sensor to monitor whether

or not the front passenger’s seat belt is fas-

tened. The front passenger’s seat belt

buckle sensor provides information which

is used to judge if the front passenger’s air

bag should deploy at reduced power or at

full power.

WARNING

An air bag supplements, or adds to,

the crash protection offered by seat

belts. The driver and all passengers

must be properly restrained by wear-

ing seat belts at all times, whether or

not air bags are mounted at their

seating position, to minimize the risk

of severe injury or death in the event

of a crash.

WARNING

If the AIR BAG light in the instrument

cluster ever comes on and stays on,

it means that something may be

wrong with the air bag system. If this

ever happens, have the vehicle ser-

viced immediately, because the air

bags may not offer the protection for

which they were designed.

CAUTION

Do not put any cargo or metal objects

under the seat. The seat position sen-

sor may not work properly or may be

damaged if it is covered with some-

thing.

WARNING

When the buckle sensor has a prob-

lem, the AIR BAG light on the instru-

ment cluster will turn on. If this

happens, deployment of the front

passenger’s air bag will not include

consideration of whether the front

passenger’s seat belt is fastened or

not. Have the air bag system

inspected by an authorized SUZUKI

dealer as soon as possible.

2-46

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Front Passenger Sensing System

The front passenger sensing system will

turn off the front passenger’s front air bag

and seat belt pretensioner under certain

conditions. This system works using a sen-

sor mat that is part of the front passenger’s

seat. The front passenger sensing system

is designed to detect whether an occupant

is present in the seat and, if an occupant is

present, to determine whether the front

passenger’s front air bag and seat belt pre-

tensioner should be enabled or disabled

(turned off).

NOTE:

The front passenger’s side air bag and the

side curtain air bag are not controlled by

the front passenger sensing system.

80J024

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”

indicator comes on for several seconds to

let you know the system is working. When

the front passenger sensing system has

turned off the front passenger’s front air

bag including the seat belt pretensioner,

the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will

come on and stay on to remind you that

the front passenger’s front air bag is off.

The front passenger sensing system uses

front seat pressure measurements and

pressure locations to determine whether to

activate or deactivate the front passenger’s

front air bag. The front passenger sensing

system may or may not turn off the front air

bag, depending on the front passenger’s

seating posture and body build. The air

bag should be turned off in the following

situations:

• There is no occupant in the front pas-

senger seat.

• The occupant of the front passenger

seat lifts his or her weight off of the seat

for a period of time.

• The occupant of the front passenger

seat is an infant or small child in a child

restraint system or a small child in a

booster seat.

• A smaller person, such as a child who

has outgrown child restraints or a very

small adolescent is seated in the front

passenger seat.

NOTE:

If the front passenger seat is unoccupied,

the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator will not

come on but the front passenger’s front air

bag will not deploy and the seat belt pre-

tensioner will not operate.

If you have secured a child in the front pas-

senger seat in a forward-facing child

restraint system or booster seat and the

“PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not

on, turn the vehicle off, remove the child

restraint or booster seat from the vehicle

and reinstall it following the child restraint

or booster seat manufacturer’s directions.

Also refer to “Seat Belts and Child

Restraint Systems” in this section. If, after

reinstalling the child restraint and restart-

ing the vehicle, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF”

indicator is still not lit, check to make sure

that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing

the child restraint into the seat cushion. If

this happens, slightly recline the vehicle’s

seatback and adjust the seat cushion if

possible. Also make sure the child restraint

is not trapped under the vehicle head

restraint. If this happens, adjust the head

restraint. If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indi-

cator is still not on, secure the child in the

child restraint or booster seat in a rear seat

position in the vehicle and check with your

dealer.

2-47

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

65D607

According to accident statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in rear

seating positions than in front seating posi-

tions. Whenever possible, SUZUKI recom-

mends you install child restraints in the

rear seat.

The front passenger sensing system is

designed to enable the front passenger’s

front air bag when the system senses a

properly-seated adult in the front passen-

ger’s seat. When the passenger sensing

system has allowed the air bag to be

enabled, the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indica-

tor will remain off to remind you that the air

bag is active.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the

front passenger’s seat and the “PASS AIR

BAG OFF” indicator comes on, it could be

because that person isn’t sitting properly in

the seat. If this happens, unfasten the seat

belts, sit upright in the center of the seat

with the seatback nearly vertical and your

legs outstretched, and refasten the seat

belt.

52D258

When seated as shown in the above illus-

tration, the front passenger sensing sys-

tem senses a properly-seated occupant

and enables the air bag.

When using a seat belt extender, follow the

instructions in the “Seat Belt Extender”

section.

WARNING

Do not install a rear-facing child

restraint in the front passenger’s

seat. If the passenger’s front air bag

inflates, a child in a rear-facing child

restraint could be seriously injured.

The back of a rear-facing child

restraint would be too close to the

inflating air bag.

WARNING

Do not place any heavy objects on

the front passenger’s seat. The pres-

sure sensors in the sensor mat could

be damaged and the front passenger

sensing system may not work prop-

erly.

WARNING

The front passenger sensing system

may not work properly in the follow-

ing situations:

• The occupant is sitting near the

dashboard or is not sitting in the

proper position.

• Objects placed under the seat are

pushing up on the seat cushion.

WARNING

If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator

on the instrument panel turns on

even though there is no occupant or

an adult occupant in the front pas-

senger’s seat, it means that some-

thing may be wrong with the

passenger sensing system. Have the

system inspected by an authorized

SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

2-48

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

How the System Works

In a frontal collision, the crash sensors will

detect rapid deceleration and send a signal

to the controller. If the controller judges

that the deceleration represents a severe

frontal crash, the controller will trigger the

inflators. The controller also judges:

• Whether the front air bags should deploy

at reduced power or at full power accord-

ing to crash severity.

• Whether the air bags should deploy at

reduced power or at full power according

to crash severity, driver’s seat fore/aft

position and whether or not the front

passenger’s seat belt is fastened.

• Whether the front passenger’s front air

bag should deploy or not based on clas-

sification of the occupant of the front

passenger’s seat.

Since your vehicle is equipped with side air

bags, and side curtain air bags, crash sen-

sors will detect a side collision, and if the

controller judges that the side collision is

severe enough, it will trigger the side air

bag and side curtain air bag inflators.

The inflators inflate the appropriate air

bags with nitrogen or argon gas. The

inflated air bags provide a cushion for your

head (front air bags and side curtain air

bags only) and upper body. The air bag

inflates and deflates so quickly that you

may not even realize that it has activated.

The air bag will neither hinder your view

nor make it harder to exit the vehicle.

Air bags must inflate quickly and forcefully

in order to reduce the chance of serious or

fatal injuries. However, an unavoidable

consequence of the quick inflation is that

the air bag may irritate bare skin, such as

the facial area against a front air bag. Also,

upon inflation, a loud noise will occur and

some powder and smoke will be released.

These conditions are not harmful and do

not indicate a fire in the car. Be aware,

however, that some air bag components

may be hot for a while after inflation.

A seat belt helps keep you in the proper

position for maximum protection when an

air bag inflates. Adjust your seat as far

back as possible while still maintaining

control of the vehicle. Sit fully back in your

seat; sit up straight; do not lean over the

steering wheel or dashboard. Front occu-

pants should not lean on or sleep against

the door. Please refer to the “Seat Adjust-

ment” section and the “Seat Belts and

Child Restraint Systems” section in the

“BEFORE DRIVING” section for details on

proper seat and seat belt adjustments.

WARNING

• Do not spill any liquids on the seat.

Liquids can damage the sensors

under the front seat.

• Have the driver’s seat position sen-

sor and the front passenger’s sen-

sor mat inspected by your dealer

after a collision.

• Do not replace the front seats. If

you replace them, the air bags and

front passenger sensing system

may not work properly.

• Do not use a seat cover. If you use

a seat cover, the front passenger

sensing system may not work prop-

erly.

2-49

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

65D610

54G582

Note that even though your vehicle may be

moderately damaged in a collision, the col-

lision may not have been severe enough to

trigger the front, side, or side curtain air

bags to inflate. If your car sustains ANY

front-end or side damage, have the air bag

system inspected by an authorized

SUZUKI dealer to ensure it is in proper

working order.

Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnostic

module which records information about

the air bag system if the air bags deploy in

a crash. The module records information

about overall system status, which sensors

activated the deployment, and whether the

front seat belts were in use.

Servicing the Air Bag System

If the air bags inflate, have the air bags and

related components replaced by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

If your vehicle ever gets in deep water and

the driver’s floor is submerged, the air bag

controller could be damaged. If this hap-

pens, have the air bag system inspected

by the SUZUKI dealer as soon as possible.

Special procedures are required for servic-

ing or replacing an air bag. For that reason,

only an authorized SUZUKI dealer should

be allowed to service or replace your air

bags. Please remind anyone who services

your SUZUKI that it has air bags.

WARNING

• The driver should not lean over the

steering wheel. The front passen-

ger should not rest his or her body

against the dashboard, or other-

wise get too close to the dash-

board. For vehicles with side air

bags and side curtain air bags,

occupants should not lean on or

sleep against the door. In these sit-

uations, the out-of-position occu-

pant would be too close to an

inflating air bag, and may suffer

severe injury.

• Do not attach any objects to, or

place any objects over, the steering

wheel or dashboard. Do not place

any objects between the air bag

and the driver or front passenger.

These objects may interfere with air

bag operation or may be propelled

by the air bag in the event of a

crash. Either of these conditions

may cause severe injury.

• For vehicles with side air bags, do

not place seat covers on the front

seats, because seat covers could

restrict the air bag’s inflation. Also,

do not place any cup holders or

other objects on the door, as these

objects could be propelled by the

air bag in the event of a crash.

Either of these conditions may

cause severe injury.

2-50

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

Service on or around air bag components

or wiring must be performed only by an

authorized SUZUKI dealer. Improper ser-

vice could result in unintended air bag

deployment or could render the air bags

inoperative. Either of these two conditions

may result in severe injury.

To prevent damage or unintended inflation

of the air bag system, be sure the battery

is disconnected and the ignition switch has

been in the “LOCK” position for at least 90

seconds before performing any electrical

service work on your SUZUKI. Do not

touch air bag system components or wires.

The wires are wrapped with yellow tape or

yellow tubing, and the couplers are yellow

for easy identification.

Scrapping a car that has an undeployed air

bag can be hazardous. Ask your dealer,

body repair shop or scrap yard for help

with disposal.

If it is necessary to modify the advanced

front air bag system to accommodate a

person with disabilities, owners in the con-

tinental United States can call American

Suzuki toll-free at 1-800-934-0934, or write

to:

American Suzuki Motor Corporation

Automotive Customer Relations

3251 East Imperial Highway

Brea, CA 92821-6795

If you purchased your SUZUKI in Canada

please contact the Suzuki Canada Cus-

tomer Relations Department by telephone

at 1-905-889-2677 extension 2254 or in

writing at:

Suzuki Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

100 East Beaver Creek Road

Richmond Hill, On

L4B 1J6

2-51

BEFORE DRIVING

80J21-03E

MEMO

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

60G405

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

Ignition Switch ..................................................................... 3-1

Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever ................................... 3-5

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever ................................ 3-6

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch (if equipped) ........... 3-8

Tilt Steering Lock Lever (if equipped) ............................... 3-8

Cruise Control (if equipped) ............................................... 3-9

Remote Audio Controls (if equipped) ............................... 3-11

Horn ...................................................................................... 3-11

3-1

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

65D611

Ignition Switch

60B041

The ignition switch has the following four

positions:

LOCK

This is the normal parking position. It is the

only position in which the key can be

removed.

Manual transaxle

60A055

•Manual transaxle vehicles

You must push in the key to turn it to the

“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition, and

prevents normal use of the steering

wheel after the key is removed.

•Automatic transaxle vehicles

The gearshift lever must be in the “P”

(Park) position to turn the key to the

“LOCK” position. It locks the ignition and

prevents normal use of the steering

wheel and gearshift lever.

WARNING

To avoid possible injury, do not oper-

ate controls by reaching through the

steering wheel.

Push

Turn to “LOCK”

Ignition Switch: 8

3-2

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

60A300S

ACC

Accessories such as the radio can oper-

ate, but the engine is off.

This is the normal operating position. All

electrical systems are on.

START

This is the position for starting the engine

using the starter motor. The key should be

released from this position as soon as the

engine starts.

Ignition key reminder

A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind

you to remove the ignition key if it is in the

ignition switch when the driver’s door is

opened.

Vehicle With Keyless Start System

80JC010

The ignition switch can be operated with-

out using an ignition key when the remote

controller is in an area of the vehicle other

than the rear luggage area. To turn the

ignition switch, first push in the switch.

NOTE:

You must push in the ignition switch to turn

it from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position. To return to the “LOCK” position

from the “ACC” position, turn the ignition

switch counterclockwise while pushing in

the switch.

80J037

If the keyless start system blue indicator

light illuminates on the instrument cluster,

you can turn the ignition switch. If the red

indicator light illuminates, you can not turn

the ignition switch.

NOTE:

• The ignition switch can be turned to the

“ACC” position when the keyless start

system blue indicator light illuminates.

The blue indicator light will illuminate for

several seconds when you push in the

ignition switch and then will turn off to

protect the system. In this case, you

must release the ignition switch and

push it in again to illuminate the blue

indicator light.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

Ignition Switch: 8

3-3

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

• If the keyless start system red indicator

light illuminates, the remote controller

may not be in the vehicle or the battery

of the remote controller may be unreli-

able.

NOTE:

• If the battery of the remote controller

runs down or there are strong radio

waves or noise, the operating range may

be narrower or the remote controller may

be inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to the

door glass, it may not operate.

• The ignition switch may not turn when

the remote controller is on the instru-

ment panel, in the glove box, in the door

pocket, in the sun visor or on the floor.

You can also turn the ignition switch by

inserting the ignition key into the slot.

The ignition switch has the following four

positions:

LOCK (1)

This is the normal parking position. It is the

only position in which the key can be

removed. It locks the ignition, and prevents

normal use of the steering wheel.

For vehicles with an automatic transaxle,

the gearshift lever must be in the “P” (Park)

position to turn the key to the “LOCK” posi-

tion.

To release the steering lock, turn the igni-

tion switch clockwise to one of the other

positions. If you have trouble turning the

ignition switch to unlock the steering, try

turning the steering wheel slightly to the

right or left while turning the switch.

NOTE:

You must push the ignition switch in to turn

it to the “ACC” position. Also you must

push the ignition switch in to return it to the

“LOCK” position.

ACC (2)

Accessories such as the radio can oper-

ate, but the engine is off.

ON (3)

This is the normal operating position. All

electrical systems are on.

START (4)

This is the position for starting the engine

using the starter motor. The switch should

be released from this position as soon as

the engine starts.

Ignition switch reminder

(When using the keyless start system)

A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind

you to return the ignition switch to the

“LOCK” position if it is in the “ACC” position

when the driver’s door is opened.

Ignition key reminder

(When using the ignition key)

A buzzer sounds intermittently to remind

you to remove the ignition key if it is in the

ignition switch when the driver’s door is

opened.

CAUTION

The remote controller is a sensitive

electronic instrument. To avoid dam-

aging the remote controller:

• Do not expose it to impacts, mois-

ture or high temperature such as by

leaving it on the dashboard under

direct sunlight.

• Keep the remote controller away

from magnetic objects such as a

television.

Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever: 8

3-4

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

62J083

If the gearshift lever can not be shifted out

of “P” (Park) in the normal way, removing

the cover (1) and pushing the release but-

ton using a key or some other flat end

object with the key in the “ON” or “ACC”

position will permit movement of the gear-

shift lever out of “P” (see “If You Can Not

Shift Automatic Transaxle Gearshift Lever

Out of “P” (PARK)” in the INDEX). The

gearshift lever can be moved back to “P”

without pushing the release button.

To release the steering lock, insert the key

or use the keyless start system and turn

the ignition switch clockwise to one of the

other positions. If you have trouble turning

the key to unlock the steering, try turning

the steering wheel slightly to the right or

left while turning the key.

81A297S

(1)

WARNING

• For manual transaxle vehicles,

never remove the ignition key while

the vehicle is moving. The steering

wheel will lock and you will not be

able to steer the vehicle.

• Always remove the ignition key

when leaving the vehicle even if a

short time. Also do not leave chil-

dren or pets alone in a parked vehi-

cle. Unattended children could

cause accidental movement of the

vehicle or could tamper with power

windows. Children or pets could

suffer from heatstroke in warm or

hot weather, which could result in

severe injury or even death.

CAUTION

• Do not turn the starter motor for

more than 15 seconds at a time. If

the engine does not start, wait 15

seconds before trying again. If the

engine does not start after several

attempts, check the fuel and igni-

tion systems or consult your

SUZUKI dealer.

• Do not leave the ignition switch in

the “ON” position if the engine is

not running or the battery will dis-

charge.

Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever: 8

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever: 8

3-5

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

Lighting/Turn Signal Control

Lever

Lighting Operation

80JC031

To turn the lights on or off, twist the knob

on the end of the lever. There are three

positions: in the “OFF” position all lights

are off; in the middle position the front

parking lights, taillights, license plate light,

and instrument lights are on, but the head-

lights are off; in the third position the head-

lights come on in addition to the other

lights.

80JC032

With the headlights on, push the lever for-

ward to switch to the high beams (main

beams) or pull the lever toward you to

switch to the low beams. When the high

beams (main beams) are on, a light on the

instrument panel will come on. To momen-

tarily activate the high beams (main

beams) as a passing signal, pull the lever

slightly toward you and release it when you

have completed the signal.

Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.)

System

The headlights light, but are dimmer than

the low beam, when the following three

conditions are all met. Also, the D.R.L. indi-

cator light on the instrument panel comes

on.

Conditions for D.R.L. system operation:

1) The engine is running.

2) The parking brake is released.

3) The lighting switch is at either the “OFF”

or the “Middle” position.

NOTE:

Be sure to turn the lighting switch to the

third position at night or at any time of the

day when driving or weather conditions

require the headlights to operate at full

brightness and the taillights to be on.

Lights “On” reminder (if equipped)

A buzzer/chime sounds to remind you to

turn off the lights if they are left on when

the ignition key is removed and the driver’s

door is opened.

EXAMPLE

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever: 8

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch: 8

3-6

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

Turn Signal Operation

With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-

tion, move the lever up or down to activate

the right or left turn signals.

Normal turn signal

80JC033

Move the lever all the way upward or down-

ward to signal. When the turn is com-

pleted, the signal will cancel and the lever

will return to its normal position.

Lane change signal

80JC034

Some times, such as when changing

lanes, the steering wheel is not turned far

enough to cancel the turn signal. For con-

venience, you can flash the turn signal by

moving the lever part way and holding it

there. The lever will return to its normal

position when you release it.

Windshield Wiper and Washer

Lever

Windshield Wipers

80JC035

To turn the windshield wipers on, move the

lever down to one of the three operating

positions. In the “INT” position (if

equipped), the wipers operate intermit-

tently. The “INT” position is very convenient

for driving in mist or light rain. In the “LO”

position, the wipers operate at a steady

low speed. In the “HI” position, the wipers

operate at a steady high speed. To turn off

the wipers, move the lever back to the

“OFF” position.

Move the lever up and hold it to the “MIST”

position, the windshield wipers will turn on

continuously at low speed.

EXAMPLE

MIST

OFF

INT

EXAMPLE

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch: 8

Tilt Steering Lock Lever: 6

Cruise Control: 7, 8

3-7

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

80JC036

If the lever is equipped with the “INT TIME”

control, turn the control forward or rear-

ward to adjust the intermittent wiper opera-

tion to the desired interval.

Windshield Washer

80JC037

To spray windshield washer fluid, pull the

lever toward you. The windshield wipers

will automatically turn on at low speed if

they are not already on and the “INT” posi-

tion is equipped.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

• To prevent windshield icing in cold

weather, turn on the defroster to

heat the windshield before and dur-

ing windshield washer use.

• Do not use radiator antifreeze in

the windshield washer reservoir. It

can severely impair visibility when

sprayed on the windshield, and can

also damage your vehicle’s paint.

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

To help prevent damage to the wind-

shield wiper and washer system

components, you should take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• Do not continue to hold in the lever

when there is no windshield

washer fluid being sprayed or the

washer motor can be damaged.

• Do not attempt to remove dirt from

a dry windshield with the wipers or

you can damage the windshield

and the wiper blades. Always wet

the windshield with washer fluid

before operating the wipers.

• Clear ice or packed snow from the

wiper blades before using the wip-

ers.

• Check the washer fluid level regu-

larly. Check it often when the

weather is bad.

• Only fill the washer fluid reservoir

3/4 full during cold weather to allow

room for expansion if the tempera-

ture falls low enough to freeze the

solution.

Cruise Control: 7, 8

3-8

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

Switch (if equipped)

80JC038

To turn the rear wiper on, twist the rear

wiper switch on the end of the lever for-

ward to the “ON” position. If your vehicle is

equipped the “INT” position, the rear wiper

operates intermittently when you twist the

switch forward to the “INT” position. To turn

the rear wiper off, twist the switch rearward

to the “OFF” position.

With the rear wiper in the “OFF” position,

twist the switch rearward and hold it there

to spray window washer fluid.

With the rear wiper in the “ON” position,

turn the switch forward and hold it there to

spray window washer fluid.

Tilt Steering Lock Lever

(if equipped)

63J026

The lock lever is located under the steering

column. To adjust the steering wheel

height:

1) Pull up the lock lever to unlock the

steering column.

2) Adjust the steering wheel to the desired

height and lock the steering column by

push down the lock lever.

3) Try moving the steering wheel up and

down to make sure it is securely locked

in position.

EXAMPLE

Intermittent wiper

Washer

Wiper

CAUTION

Clear ice or snow from the rear win-

dow and rear wiper blade before

using the rear wiper. Accumulated ice

or snow could prevent the wiper

blade from moving, causing damage

to the wiper motor.

LOCK UNLOCK

EXAMPLE

Cruise Control: 7, 8

Remote Audio Controls:

Horn: 6

3-9

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

Cruise Control (if equipped)

80J025

The cruise control system allows you to

maintain a steady speed without keeping

your foot on the accelerator pedal. The

controls for operating the cruise control

system are on the steering wheel. You can

use the cruise control system at speeds of

about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.

52D113

When you push the “ON/OFF” switch, the

system is on and a “CRUISE” indicator

light on the instrument cluster will be on.

65D474

When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by

the cruise control system, a “SET” indica-

tor light on the instrument cluster will be

on.

WARNING

Never attempt to adjust the steering

wheel height while the vehicle is

moving or you could lose control of

the vehicle.

WARNING

To help avoid loss of vehicle control,

do not use the cruise control system

when driving in heavy traffic, on slip-

pery or winding roads, or on steep

downgrades.

3-10

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

80J026

To Set Cruising Speed

Turn on the cruise control system by push-

ing the “ON/OFF” switch (1). Accelerate to

the desired speed and push the “SET/

COAST” switch (3). Take your foot off the

accelerator pedal and the set speed will be

maintained.

With the cruise control on, you can

increase speed for passing by using the

accelerator pedal. When you take your foot

off the pedal, your vehicle will return to the

set speed.

To Change Cruising Speed

To reset the cruise control to a slower

speed, press repeatedly or hold in the

“SET/COAST” switch (3) until the vehicle

has slowed to the desired speed, then

release the switch. The new speed will be

maintained.

To reset the cruise control to a faster

speed, use either of the following proce-

dures:

• Press repeatedly or hold in the “RES/

ACC” switch (4). Vehicle speed will

steadily increase. When you release the

switch, the new speed will be main-

tained.

• Accelerate to the desired speed using

the accelerator pedal and push the

“SET/COAST” switch (3). The new

speed will be maintained.

To Cancel

To cancel cruise control operation, use one

of the following procedures:

• Slightly depress the brake pedal or

clutch pedal, or push the “CANCEL”

switch (2). Cruise control operation will

be canceled until you reset a cruising

speed by pushing the “SET/COAST”

switch (3) or “RES/ACC” switch (4).

• Push the “ON/OFF” switch (1). Cruise

control operation will be canceled until

you turn on the system by pushing the

“ON/OFF” switch (1) again and reset a

cruising speed by pushing the “SET/

COAST” switch (3).

Cruise control operation will also be can-

celed any time the vehicle speed falls

below 40 km/h (25 mph).

To “Resume” a Previously Set

Speed

After canceling cruise control operation

without turning off the “ON/OFF” switch

(1), you can “resume” a previously set

speed, by holding the “RES/ACC” switch

(4) for about one second. When you

release the switch, the vehicle will acceler-

ate to and maintain the previously set

speed.

NOTE:

If the “ON/OFF” switch (1) is turned off, the

set speed in the memory is cleared and

you can not use the Resume feature. In

this case, reset your CRUISE speed.

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

3-11

STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS

80J21-03E

Remote Audio Controls

(if equipped)

80J027

You can control basic functions of the

audio system with the switches on the

steering wheel. For details, refer to “Audio

Systems” in the “INSTRUMENT PANEL”

section.

Horn

80J028

Press the horn pad on the steering wheel

to sound the horn. The horn will sound with

the ignition switch in any position.

EXAMPLE

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

60G406

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel ................................................................. 4-1

Instrument Cluster .............................................................. 4-2

Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 4-3

A/T Selector Position Indicator (if equipped) ................... 4-10

Speedometer/Odometer/Trip meter ................................... 4-11

Tachometer .......................................................................... 4-12

Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 4-12

Temperature Gauge ............................................................ 4-13

Hazard Warning Switch ...................................................... 4-13

“ESP OFF” Switch (if equipped) ........................................ 4-13

Instrument Light Brightness Control ................................ 4-14

2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive) Switch

(if equipped) ......................................................................... 4-14

Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview

Mirrors (if equipped) Switch ............................................... 4-15

Fog Light Switch (if equipped) ........................................... 4-16

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray (if equipped) ..................... 4-16

Information Display ............................................................. 4-17

Glove Box ............................................................................ 4-20

Heating and Air Conditioning System ............................... 4-21

Audio Systems .................................................................... 4-32

4-1

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Instrument Panel

1. Instrument cluster

2. Ignition switch

3. Lighting switch/Turn signal and dim-

mer switch

4. Windshield wiper and washer switch/

Rear window wiper and washer

switch (if equipped)

5. Hazard warning switch

6. Other switches (if equipped)

7. Heater control panel

8. Audio (if equipped)

9. Cigarette lighter/ashtray or storage

area

10. Hood release

11. Center ventilator

12. Side ventilator

13. Side defroster

14. Glove box

15. Fuse box

16. Air bag

17. Information display

80J029

EXAMPLE

1213 13 1331614 11 517 8161213

15 10

629714

Instrument Panel: 3, 8

4-2

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Instrument Cluster

1. Speedometer

2. Odometer/Trip meter

3. Odometer/Trip meter selector knob

4. Tachometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Temperature gauge

7. Warning and indicator lights

80JC011

471 5

67327

EXAMPLE

Instrument Cluster: 8

4-3

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Warning and Indicator Lights

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

52D305

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a tire pressure

monitoring system (TPMS) that uses a low

tire pressure warning light to inform you

when one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working.

When the low tire pressure warning light is

lit, one or more of your tires is significantly

under-inflated. You should stop and check

your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

them to the proper pressure as indicated

on the vehicle’s tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability. Each tire, including the spare,

should be checked at least once a month

when cold and set to the recommended

inflation pressure as specified in the vehi-

cle placard and owner’s manual.

The low tire pressure warning light is also

used to inform you of a TPMS malfunction.

When the system detects a malfunction,

this light will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will be repeated

approximately ten minutes after subse-

quent the ignition switch is turned on as

long as the malfunction exists.

NOTE:

The low tire pressure warning light may not

come on immediately if you have a sudden

loss of air pressure.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not come on when the ignition

is turned to the “ON” position, or

comes on and blinks while driving

there may be a problem with the tire

pressure monitoring system. Have

your vehicle inspected by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the light

turns off after blinking, indicating

that monitoring system has recov-

ered, make sure to have an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer check the

system.

WARNING

The load rating of your tires is

reduced at lower inflation pressures.

If your tires become even moderately

under-inflated, the vehicle load may

exceed the load rating of the tires,

which can lead to tire failure. The low

tire pressure warning light will not

alert you of this condition. The warn-

ing light will only come on when one

or more of your tires become signifi-

cantly under-inflated. Check and

adjust your tire inflation pressure at

least once a month. Refer to “Tires”

in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-

NANCE” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on and stays on, reduce your

speed and avoid abrupt steering and

braking. Stop in a safe place as soon

as possible and check your tires.

• If you have a flat tire, replace it with

the spare tire. Refer to “Jacking

Instructions” in the “EMERGENCY

SERVICE” section. Refer to

“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”

for instructions on how to restore

normal operation of the tire pres-

sure monitoring system after you

have had a flat tire.

(Continued)

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8

4-4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System”

in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-

tion for additional details on the tire pres-

sure monitoring system. Refer to “Tires” in

the “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”

section for information on maintaining

proper tire pressure.

Brake System Warning Light

65D477

This light comes on briefly when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The light also comes on under the follow-

ing conditions: 1) when the parking brake

is engaged and 2) when the fluid in the

brake fluid reservoir falls below the speci-

fied level. The light should go out after fully

releasing the parking brake, if the fluid

level in the brake fluid reservoir is ade-

quate.

If this light and the ABS warning light stay

on, or come on simultaneously when driv-

ing, then there may be something wrong

with both the rear brake proportioning

valve function and anti-lock function of the

ABS.

If the brake system warning light comes on

while you are driving the vehicle, it may

mean that there is something wrong with

the vehicle’s brake system. If this happens,

you should:

1) Pull off the road and stop carefully.

2) Test the brakes by carefully starting and

stopping on the shoulder of the road.

3) If you determine that it is safe, drive

cautiously at low speed to the nearest

dealer for repairs,

4) Have the vehicle towed to the nearest

dealer for repairs.

WARNING

(Continued)

• If one or more of your tires is

under-inflated, adjust the inflation

pressure in all of your tires to the

recommended inflation pressure as

soon as possible.

Be aware that driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire can cause

the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure, and may affect steering

control and brake effectiveness. This

could lead to an accident, resulting in

severe injury or death.

WARNING

Remember that stopping distance

may be longer, you may have to push

harder on the pedal, and the pedal

may go down farther than normal.

WARNING

If any of the following conditions

occur, you should immediately ask

your SUZUKI dealer to inspect the

brake system.

• If the brake system warning light

does not go out after the parking

brake has been fully released.

• If the brake system warning light

does not come on when the igni-

tion switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

• If the brake system warning light

comes on at any time during vehi-

cle operation.

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8

4-5

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

NOTE:

Because the disc brake system is self-

adjusting, the fluid level will drop as the

brake pads become worn.

Replenishing the brake fluid reservoir is

considered normal periodic maintenance.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

Warning Light

65D529

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working. If

the light stays on, or comes on when driv-

ing, there may be something wrong with

the ABS.

If the ABS light and the brake system

warning light stay on, or come on simulta-

neously when driving, then there may be

something wrong with both the rear brake

proportioning valve function and anti-lock

function of the ABS.

If one of these happens, have the system

inspected by your SUZUKI dealer. If the

ABS becomes inoperative, the brake sys-

tem will function as an ordinary brake sys-

tem that has no ABS.

For details of the ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS)” in the “OPERATING

YOUR VEHICLE” section.

SLIP Indicator Light (if equipped)

66J033

ESP® is a registered trademark of

DaimlerChrysler AG.

This light blinks 5 times per second when

one of the ESP® systems other than ABS

is activated. If this light blinks, drive care-

fully.

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working. If

the light stays on, or comes on when driv-

ing and remains on, there may be some-

thing wrong with the ESP® systems (other

than ABS). You should have the system

inspected by an authorized SUZUKI

dealer.

NOTE:

When you disconnect and re-connect the

battery, ESP® system functions other than

ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-

tor light will blink 1 time per second. For

details on how to reactive the ESP® sys-

tems, refer to “SLIP Indicator Light” in the

“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

For details of the ESP® systems, refer to

“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in

the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-

tion.

“ESP” (Electronic Stability

Program) Warning Light

(if equipped)

66J031

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working. If

the light stays on, or comes on when driv-

ing, there may be something wrong with

the ESP® systems (other than ABS). You

should have the system inspected by an

authorized SUZUKI dealer.

WARNING

The ESP® systems cannot prevent

accidents. Always drive carefully.

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8

4-6

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

For details of the ESP® systems, refer to

“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in

the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-

tion.

“ESP OFF” Indicator Light

(if equipped)

66J032

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working.

When the “ESP OFF” switch is pushed to

turn off the ESP® systems (other than

ABS), the “ESP OFF” light comes on and

stays on.

For details of the ESP® systems, refer to

“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in

the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-

tion.

Oil Pressure Light

50G051

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, and

goes out when the engine is started. The

light will come on and remain on if there is

insufficient oil pressure. If the light comes

on when driving, pull off the road as soon

as you can and stop the engine. Check the

oil level and add oil if necessary. If there is

enough oil, the lubrication system should

be inspected by your SUZUKI dealer

before you drive the vehicle again.

Charging Light

50G052

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, and

goes out when the engine is started. The

light will come on and remain on if there is

something wrong with the battery charging

system. If the light comes on when the

engine is running, the charging system

should be inspected immediately by your

SUZUKI dealer.

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

60G049

If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, this light will come on and then

blink. When the light comes on, a buzzer

will also sound intermittently for about 6

seconds. The reminder will repeat several

times under certain conditions until the

CAUTION

• If you operate the engine with this

light on, severe engine damage can

result.

• Do not rely on the Oil Pressure

Light to indicate the need to add

oil. Be sure to periodically check

the engine oil level.

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8

4-7

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

driver’s seat belt is buckled. After repeating

several times, the reminder will be can-

celed even if the driver’s seat belt remains

unbuckled.

For details about the seat belt reminder,

refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint

Systems” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sec-

tion.

AIR BAG Light

63J030

This light monitors inflators, crash sensors,

seat belt pretensioners, the front passen-

ger sensing system, and corresponding

electrical circuits.

This light blinks for several seconds when

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position so you can check if the light is

working. The light will come on and stay on

if there is a problem in the air bag system

or the seat belt pretensioner system.

Malfunction Indicator Light

65D530

Your vehicle has a computer-controlled

emission control system. A malfunction

indicator light is provided on the instrument

panel to indicate when it is necessary to

have the emission control system serviced.

The malfunction indicator light comes on

when the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position to let you know the light is

working and goes out when the engine is

started.

If the malfunction indicator light comes on

or blinks when the engine is running, ser-

vice to the emission control system is nec-

essary. Bring the vehicle to your SUZUKI

dealer to have the emission control system

serviced right away and avoid hard accel-

eration until the service is performed.

NOTE:

If the fuel filler cap is not installed fully, the

electrical system gets wet (such as by driv-

ing through a deep puddle of water) or the

fuel tank gets nearly empty, the malfunc-

tion indicator light may come on. If so, the

light will go off after driving a few times

after the fuel filler cap is installed fully, the

electrical system dries out or the fuel tank

is filled.

WARNING

It is absolutely essential that the

driver and passengers wear their seat

belts at all times. Persons who are

not wearing seat belts have a much

greater risk of injury if an accident

occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-

ling your seat belt before putting the

key in the ignition.

WARNING

If the AIR BAG light does not blink

when the ignition switch is turned to

the “ON” position or stays on or

comes on when driving, the air bag

system or the seat belt pretensioner

system may not work properly. Have

both systems inspected by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer.

CAUTION

Continuing to drive the vehicle when

the malfunction indicator light is on

or blinking can cause permanent

damage to the vehicle’s emission

control system, and can affect fuel

economy and driveability.

Warning and Indicator Lights: 8

A/T Selector Position Indicator: 8

Speedometer/Odometer/Trip meter: 8

4-8

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Low Fuel Warning Light

54G343

If this light comes on, fill the fuel tank

immediately.

NOTE:

The activation point of this light varies

depending on road conditions (for exam-

ple, slope or curve) and driving conditions

because of fuel moving in the tank.

Electric Power Steering Light

(if equipped)

79J039

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, and

goes out when the engine is started.

If this light comes on while driving, the

power steering system may not work prop-

erly. Have the system inspected by your

SUZUKI dealer.

NOTE:

If the power steering system does not work

properly, you will feel heavier to steer but

you still will be able to steer.

Open Door Warning Light

54G391

This light remains on until all doors (includ-

ing the tailgate of SX4) are completely

closed.

“CRUISE” Indicator Light

(if equipped)

52D113

When the cruise control system is on, this

light will be on.

“SET” Indicator Light (if equipped)

65D474

When the vehicle’s speed is controlled by

the cruise control system, this light will be

on.

Keyless Start System Indicator

Light (if equipped)

62J041

When you push the ignition switch for vehi-

cle with the keyless start system, this light

will come on in blue or red. If this light

comes on in blue, you can turn the ignition

switch without using an ignition key. If this

light comes on in red, you can not turn the

ignition switch without using an ignition

key. For details, refer to “Ignition Switch” in

the “STEERING COLUMN CONTROLS”

section.

Speedometer/Odometer/Trip meter: 8

Meter Illumination Control:

4-9

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

If this light blinks in red, it reminds you that

the remote controller is not in the vehicle.

For details, refer to “Keyless Start System

Remote Controller/Keyless Entry System

Transmitter” in the “BEFORE DRIVING”

section.

Turn Signal Indicators

50G055

When you turn on the left or right turn sig-

nals, the corresponding green arrow on the

instrument panel will flash along with the

respective turn signal lights.

When you turn on the hazard warning

switch, both arrows will flash along with all

of the turn signal lights.

High Beam Indicator Light

50G056

This indicator comes on when headlight

high beams are turned on.

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD)

AUTO Indicator Light (if equipped)

79J040

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working.

When the 2WD/i-AWD switch is in the “i-

AWD AUTO” mode with the ignition switch

in the “ON” position, the light comes on

and stays on.

If the light and the “i-AWD LOCK” indicator

light stay on or come on simultaneously

when driving, there may be something

wrong with the i-AWD system. Have the

system inspected by an authorized

SUZUKI dealer.

If the oil temperature of the parts for i-AWD

system is high, this light will blink. The “i-

AWD AUTO” or “i-AWD LOCK” mode will

be changed to the “2WD” mode automati-

cally to prevent a damage of the parts for i-

AWD system.

NOTE:

If you restart the engine, the light will stop

blinking temporarily.

For details, refer to “Using the 2WD/i-AWD

Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-

CLE” section.

NOTE:

When the vehicle speed is increased, the

“i-AWD LOCK” mode will be changed to

the “i-AWD AUTO” mode automatically.

The “i-AWD AUTO” indicator light will come

on and stay on.

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD)

LOCK Indicator Light (if equipped)

79J100

When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position, this light comes on briefly so

you can check that the light is working.

The light comes on when the 2WD/i-AWD

switch is changed to the “i-AWD LOCK”

mode from the “i-AWD AUTO” mode.

If the light and the “i-AWD AUTO” indicator

light stay on or come on simultaneously

when driving, there may be something

wrong with the i-AWD system. Have the

system inspected by an authorized

SUZUKI dealer.

Tachometer:

Fuel Gauge:

4-10

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

NOTE:

• When the vehicle speed is increased,

the “i-AWD LOCK” mode will be changed

to the “i-AWD AUTO” mode automati-

cally. The “i-AWD AUTO” indicator light

will come on and stay on.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position, the “i-AWD LOCK” mode

is canceled.

For details of the “i-AWD LOCK” mode,

refer to “Using the 2WD/i-AWD Switch” in

the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-

tion.

Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Indi-

cator Light (if equipped)

60B245

With the D.R.L. system, the headlights

light, but are dimmer than the low beam,

when the following three conditions are all

met. Whenever the D.R.L. system is oper-

ating, the D.R.L. indicator light remains on.

Conditions for D.R.L. system operation

1) The engine is running.

2) The parking brake is released.

3) The lighting switch is at either the “OFF”

or the “middle” position.

A/T Selector Position

Indicator (if equipped)

80J031

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, this indicator shows the selector

position of automatic transaxle.

CAUTION

Do not operate your vehicle in “i-

AWD LOCK” mode on dry hard sur-

faces.

Temperature Gauge: 8

Hazard Warning Switch: 8

Rear Window Defroster Switch:

4-11

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Speedometer/Odometer/Trip

meter

80J032

(1) Speedometer

(2) Odometer/Trip meter

(3) Indication selector knob

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed

in MPH.

Odometer/Trip meter

When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”,

the display shows the odometer or trip

meter. The odometer records the total dis-

tance the vehicle has been driven. The trip

meter can be used to measure the dis-

tance traveled on short trips or between

fuel stops.

65D603

When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”

with the lighting switch is in the “OFF” posi-

tion, the display shows three types of indi-

cation; odometer (A), trip meter A (B) and

trip meter B (C). Push the selector knob (3)

quickly to switch the indication among the

three.

You can use the two trip meters (A and B)

independently.

80J057

Hold in the selector knob for about 2 sec-

onds to reset the trip meter to zero.

(2) (3)(1)

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

Keep track of your odometer reading

and check the maintenance schedule

regularly for required services.

Increased wear or damage to certain

parts can result from failure to per-

form required services at the proper

mileage intervals.

(3)

(A) (B)

(C)

About 2 seconds

(3)

Outside Rearview Mirrors Defroster Switch:

Fog Light Switch: 8

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray: 3, 8

4-12

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Tachometer

80J033

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute.

Fuel Gauge

80JC039

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, this gauge gives an approximate

indication of the amount of fuel in the fuel

tank. “F” stands for full and “E” stands for

empty.

If the indicator gets off the graduation of

“E” (not character “E”), refill the tank as

soon as possible.

NOTE:

The indicator moves a little depending on

road conditions (for example, slope or

curve) and driving conditions because of

fuel moving in the tank.

If the low fuel warning light (1) comes on,

fill the fuel tank immediately.

NOTE:

The activation point of the low fuel warning

light (1) varies depending on road condi-

tions (for example, slope or curve) and

driving conditions because of fuel moving

in the tank.

The mark (2) indicates that the fuel filler

door is located on the left side of the vehi-

cle.

CAUTION

Never drive with the engine speed

indicator in the red zone or severe

engine damage can result.

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray: 3, 8

Information Display:

4-13

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Temperature Gauge

79J133

When the ignition switch is in the “ON”

position, this gauge indicates the engine

coolant temperature. Under normal driving

conditions, the indicator should stay within

the normal, acceptable temperature range

between “H” and “C”. If the indicator

approaches “H”, overheating is indicated.

Follow the instructions for engine overheat-

ing in the “EMERGENCY SERVICE” sec-

tion.

Hazard Warning Switch

79J041

Push in the hazard warning switch to acti-

vate the hazard warning lights. All four turn

signal lights and both turn signal indicators

will flash simultaneously. To turn off the

lights, push the switch again.

Use the hazard warning lights to warn

other traffic during emergency parking or

when your vehicle could otherwise become

a traffic hazard.

“ESP OFF” Switch

(if equipped)

79J180

ESP® is a registered trademark of

DaimlerChrysler AG.

The “ESP OFF” switch is located on the

center console. You can turn the ESP®

systems (other than ABS) on or off using

this switch.

To turn off the ESP® systems (other than

ABS), push and hold the “ESP OFF” switch

until the “ESP OFF” indicator light comes

on.

To turn on all of the ESP® systems, push

the “ESP OFF” switch again. The “ESP

OFF” indicator light will go out.

EXAMPLE

Information Display:

4-14

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

For details of the ESP® systems, refer to

“Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)” in

the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” sec-

tion.

Instrument Light Brightness

Control

66J038

Your vehicle has a system to automatically

dim the instrument panel lights when the

ignition switch is in the “ON” position and

the lighting switch is turned to either the

second or third position. The level of

brightness depends on the position of the

brightness control thumbwheel.

To cancel the automatic dimming feature

and maintain full brightness of lights other

than the audio display, turn the instrument

brightness control thumbwheel upward

until click is heard. To activate the auto-

matic dimming feature, turn the brightness

control thumbwheel downward. When the

thumbwheel is in the minimum brightness

position, the instrument panel lights,

except for the meter lights, are turned off.

2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All

Wheel Drive) Switch

(if equipped)

79J177

The 2WD/i-AWD switch is located on the

center console.

For details on how to use the 2WD/i-AWD

switch, refer to “Using the 2WD/i-AWD

Switch” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHI-

CLE” section.

EXAMPLE

Information Display:

Glove Box: 3

4-15

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Heated Rear Window and

Heated Outside Rearview

Mirrors (if equipped) Switch

Type 1

79J043

Type 2

79J119

When the rear window is misted, push this

switch (1) to clear the window.

80JC040

If the driver’s outside rearview mirror has

the mark (2), it is also equipped with the

heated outside rearview mirrors. When you

push the switch (1), both the heated out-

side rearview mirrors and the heated rear

window will operate simultaneously.

An indicator light will be lit when the defog-

ger is on. The defogger will work only

when the engine is running. To turn off the

defogger, push the switch again.

(1)

(2)

CAUTION

The heated rear window and the

heated outside rearview mirrors (if

equipped) use a large amount of elec-

tricity. Be sure to turn off after the

window and mirrors have become

clear.

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-16

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Fog Light Switch (if equipped)

64J058

The front fog light comes on when the fog

light switch is pushed in with the lighting

switch turned to the third position and the

beams set to the low beam position.

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray

(if equipped)

Cigarette Lighter (if equipped)

80JC041

The cigarette lighter will work when the

ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” posi-

tion.

To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into the receptacle and release it. It

will automatically heat up and will pop out

to its normal position when it is ready for

use.

Ashtray (if equipped)

79J047

You can fit the ashtray into any of the cup

holders on the center console.

CAUTION

Holding the cigarette lighter in can

overheat and damage the lighter.

Release the lighter after you push it

in.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the cigarette

lighter socket, do not use it as an

accessory power source. Some

accessories’ power plug can damage

the inner mechanism of the cigarette

lighter socket.

WARNING

Make sure tobacco is fully extin-

guished before closing the ashtrays.

Never throw waste in the ashtrays: it

could create a fire hazard.

EXAMPLE

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-17

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Information Display

80J035

(1) Clock

(2) Thermometer

(3) Instantaneous fuel consumption/Aver-

age fuel consumption/Driving range

(4) “H” button

(5) “M” button

(6) “DISP” button

(7) Freezing mark

(8) “SET” button

Clock (1)

The clock is shown when the ignition

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To set the clock, follow the instructions

below.

• To set the hour display, push the “H” but-

ton (4) repeatedly to advance the hour

display. To advance the hour display

quickly, hold in the “H” button (4) for

about 1 second and continue holding.

• To set the minute display, push the “M”

button (5) repeatedly to advance the

minute display. To advance the minute

display quickly, hold in the “M” button (5)

for about 1 second and continue holding.

Thermometer (2)

The thermometer shows the outside tem-

perature when the ignition switch is in the

“ON” position.

If the outside temperature nears freezing,

the mark (7) will come on when the display

shows the outside temperature.

NOTE:

The thermometer will not indicate the

actual outside temperature when driving at

low speed, or when stopped.

You can change the unit indication of the

thermometer between °F and °C.

To change the indication, follow the instruc-

tions below.

1) Hold in the “SET” button (8) for more

than 2 seconds.

The unit display of the thermometer will

blink.

80J089

2) Push the “SET” button (8) quickly to

change the indication between °F and

°C as shown in the illustration.

3) Hold in the “SET” button (8) for more

than 2 seconds, and the unit indication

will stop blinking.

If you don’t push the “SET” button (8)

within about 8 seconds after the unit

display starts blinking, the unit display

will automatically stop blinking.

Fuel Consumption and Driving

Range (3)

This display can be changed to show

instantaneous fuel consumption, average

fuel consumption, or driving range. Also,

the display of fuel consumption can be

turned off if you desire.

(4)

(2)(1) (3)

(5) (8)(7) (6)

EXAMPLE

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-18

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

80J079

Every time you push the “DISP” button (6),

the display will be changed among the fol-

lowing four displays.

(a) Instantaneous fuel consumption

(b) Average fuel consumption

(d) No display

Instantaneous fuel consumption (a)

If you selected instantaneous fuel con-

sumption the last time you drove the vehi-

cle, the display indicates “--.-” when the

ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or

“ON” position. Unless the vehicle is mov-

ing, the display will indicate “--.-”.

Average fuel consumption (b)

If you selected average fuel consumption

the last time you drove the vehicle, the dis-

play shows the last value of average fuel

consumption when the ignition switch is

turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position.

Unless you reset the value of average fuel

consumption, the display will show the

value of average fuel consumption which

includes average fuel consumption during

previous driving.

To reset the value of average fuel con-

sumption, hold in the “DISP” button (6) for

more than 2 seconds when the display

shows an average fuel consumption value.

The display will indicate “--.-” and then will

show a new average fuel consumption

value after driving for a short time.

Driving range (c)

If you selected driving range the last time

you drove the vehicle, the display shows “--

.-” for a few seconds and then shows the

current driving range when the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

The driving range shown in the display is

the approximate distance you can drive

until the fuel gauge indicates “E” based

current driving conditions.

When the remaining fuel in fuel tank

reaches a low level, the display “--.-” will

appear.

If the low fuel warning light comes on, fill

the fuel tank immediately regardless of the

value of driving range shown in the display.

As the driving range after refueling is cal-

culated based on the last driving condition,

the value is different each time you refuel.

NOTE:

• When you reconnect the negative (-) ter-

minal to the battery, the value of driving

range will be shown after driving for a

while.

• For a new vehicle with low mileage, the

driving range may not be shown

promptly in the display when begining to

drive. The driving range will be shown

after a while.

NOTE:

The values of fuel consumption and driving

range shown in the display are affected by

conditions such as the following;

• road condition

• surrounding traffic condition

• driving condition

• vehicle condition

• when the malfunction indicator light

comes on or blinks

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-19

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Unit indication of fuel consumption and

driving range

You can change the unit indication of fuel

consumption when selecting instanta-

neous fuel consumption or average fuel

consumption in the display.

You can also change the unit indication of

driving range when selecting driving range

in the display.

To change the unit indication in the display,

follow the instructions below.

You should operate the display before the

vehicle moves.

1) Hold in the “SET” button (8) for more

than 2 seconds.

The unit display of the thermometer will

blink.

2) Push the “M” button (5), and the unit

display of fuel consumption (or driving

range) will blink.

Fuel consumption

80J080

Driving range

80J090

3) Push the “SET” button (8) quickly to

change the indication as shown in the

above illustrations.

4) Push the “SET” button (8) for more than

2 seconds, and the unit display will stop

blinking and the display will stay on. If

you don’t push the “DISP” button (6)

within about 8 seconds, the unit display

will automatically stop blinking and the

display will stay on.

NOTE:

“MPG” is based on US gallons.

NOTE:

When you reconnect the negative (–) ter-

minal to the battery, the information display

will be reinitialized. Readjust the display. If

you select driving range, the display will be

shown after driving for a while.

Front Passenger’s Seat Belt

Reminder Light

80J021

The front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light is located in the information display. If

there is a passenger in the front seat and

the front passenger’s seat belt is unbuck-

led about 10 seconds after the ignition

switch is turned to the “ON” position, this

light will come on and then blink. When the

light comes on, a buzzer will also sound

intermittently for about 6 seconds. The

reminder will repeat several times under

certain conditions until the front passen-

ger’s seat belt is buckled. After repeating

several times, the reminder will be can-

celed even if the front passenger’s seat

belt remains unbuckled.

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-20

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

For details about the seat belt reminder,

refer to “Seat Belts and Child Restraint

Systems” in the “BEFORE DRIVING” sec-

tion.

“PASS AIRBAG OFF” Indicator

80J024

The “PASS AIRBAG OFF” indicator is

located on the information display. When

the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”

position, this indicator comes on for several

seconds to let you know the indicator is

working.

This indicator will come on and remain on

when the front passenger sensing system

has turned off the front passenger’s air

bag.

For details about the front passenger sens-

ing system, refer to “Supplemental

Restraint System (air bags)” in the

“BEFORE DRIVIING” section.

Theft Deterrent Light

80J058

This light will blink with the ignition switch

in the “OFF” or “ACC” position. The blink-

ing light is intended to deter theft by lead-

ing others to believe that the vehicle is

equipped with a security system.

Glove Box

79J120

To open the glove box, pull the latch lever.

To close it, push the lid until it latches

securely.

WARNING

It is absolutely essential that the

driver and passengers wear their seat

belts at all times. Persons who are

not wearing seat belts have a much

greater risk of injury if an accident

occurs. Make a regular habit of buck-

ling your seat belt before putting the

key in the ignition.

WARNING

Never drive with the glove box lid

open. It could cause injury if an acci-

dent occurs.

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-21

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Heating and Air Conditioning

System

There are three types of heating and air

conditioning systems as follows:

• Heating System

• Manual Heating and Air Conditioning

System

• Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning

System (Climate Control)

Air Outlet

79J064

1. Windshield defroster outlet

2. Side defroster outlet

3. Side outlet

4. Center outlet

5. Floor outlet

EXAMPLE

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-22

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Side outlet

63J045

When “Open”, air comes out regardless of

the air flow selector position.

Heating System

Description of Controls

63J193

Temperature selector (1)

This is used to select the temperature by

turning the selector.

Blower speed selector (2)

This is used to turn on the blower and to

select blower speed by turning the selec-

tor.

Air flow selector (3)

63J048

This is used to select one of the functions

described below.

Ventilation (a)

79J065

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the center and side air outlets.

(1) (2) (3)

(4)

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-23

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Bi-level (b)

79J066

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and cooler air comes out

of the center and side outlets. When the

temperature selector (1) is in the fully

COLD position or fully HOT position, how-

ever, the air from the floor outlets and the

air from the center and side outlets will be

the same temperature.

Heat (c)

79J067

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and the side outlets, also

comes out of the windshield defroster out-

lets and the side defroster outlets slightly.

Heat & defrost (d)

79J068

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets, the windshield defroster

outlets, the side defroster outlets and the

side outlets.

Defrost (e)

79J069

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the windshield defroster outlets, the side

defroster outlets and the side outlets.

Air intake selector (4)

63J047

This selector is used to select the following

modes.

Fresh Air (f)

When this mode is selected, the indicator

light will go off and outside air is used.

Recirculated Air (g)

When this mode is selected, the indicator

light will come on, outside air is shut out

and inside air is recirculated. This mode is

suitable when driving through dusty or pol-

luted air such as in a tunnel, or when

attempting to quickly cool down the inte-

rior.

“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”

are switched alternately each time the air

intake selector is pushed.

NOTE:

If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an

extended period of time, the air in the vehi-

cle can become contaminated. Therefore,

you should occasionally select “FRESH

AIR”.

(g)(f)

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-24

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

System Operating Instructions

Natural ventilation

Select “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”,

the temperature selector to the desired

temperature position, and the blower

speed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flow

through the vehicle during driving.

Forced ventilation

The control settings are the same as for

natural ventilation except you set the

blower speed selector to a position other

than “OFF”.

Normal heating (using outside air)

Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem-

perature selector to the desired tempera-

ture position and the blower speed selector

to the desired blower speed position. Set-

ting the blower speed selector to a higher

blower speed position increases heating

efficiency.

Quick heating (using recirculated air)

The control settings are the same as for

normal heating except you select “RECIR-

CULATED AIR”. If you use this heating

method for an extended period of time, the

air in the vehicle can become contami-

nated and the windows can become misty.

Therefore, use this method only for quick

heating and change to the normal heating

method as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating

Select “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, the

temperature selector to the desired tem-

perature position, and the blower speed

selector to the desired blower speed posi-

tion. Unless the temperature selector is in

the fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-

tion, the air that comes out of the center

and side outlets will be cooler than the air

that comes out of the floor outlets.

Defrosting/Feet warmed heating

Select “HEAT & DEFROST” and “FRESH

AIR”, the temperature selector to the

desired temperature position, and the

blower speed selector to HIGH. When the

windshield has become clear, set the

blower speed selector to the desired

blower speed position.

Defrosting

Select “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”, the

temperature selector to the desired tem-

perature position (higher temperature pro-

vides more efficient defrosting), and the

blower speed selector to HIGH. When the

windshield has become clear, set the

blower speed selector to the desired

blower speed position.

79J070

NOTE:

If you need maximum defrosting, adjust the

temperature selector to the HOT end and

adjust the side outlets so the air blows on

the side window, in addition to the above

Defrosting steps.

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-25

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Manual Heating and Air

Conditioning System

Description of Controls

80JC042

Temperature selector (1)

This is used to select the temperature by

turning the selector.

Blower speed selector (2)

This is used to turn on the blower and to

select blower speed by turning the selec-

tor.

Air flow selector (3)

80JC043

This is used to select one of the functions

described below.

Ventilation (a)

79J065

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the center and side air outlets.

Bi-level (b)

79J066

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and cooler air comes out

of the center and side outlets. When the

temperature selector (1) is in the fully

COLD position or fully HOT position, how-

ever, the air from the floor outlets and the

air from the center and side outlets will be

the same temperature.

Heat (c)

79J067

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and the side outlets, also

comes out of the windshield defroster out-

lets and the side defroster outlets slightly.

(1) (2)(5) (3)

(4)

(a)

(b)

(e)

(d)

(c)

Heating and Air Conditioning System: 4

4-26

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Heat & defrost (d)

79J068

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets, the windshield defroster

outlets, the side defroster outlets and the

side outlets.

Defrost (e)

79J069

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the windshield defroster outlets, the side

defroster outlets and the side outlets.

NOTE:

When the air flow selector (3) is turned

either to “Heat & defrost (d)” or “Defrost

(e)”, the air conditioning system will come

on and the “FRESH AIR” mode will be

selected automatically.

Air intake selector (4)

63J047

This selector is used to select the following

modes.

Fresh Air (f)

When this mode is selected, the indicator

light will go off and outside air is used.

Recirculated Air (g)

When this mode is selected, the indicator

light will come on, outside air is shut out

and inside air is recirculated. This mode is

suitable when driving through dusty or pol-

luted air such as in a tunnel, or when

attempting to quickly cool down the inte-

rior.

“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”

are switched alternately each time the air

intake selector is pushed.

NOTE:

If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for an

extended period of time, the air in the vehi-

cle can become contaminated. Therefore,

you should occasionally select “FRESH

AIR”.

Air conditioning switch (5)

To turn on the air conditioning system,

push in the “A/C” switch and set the blower

speed selector to a position other than

“OFF”. With this “A/C” switch operation, a

indicator light will come on when the air

conditioning system is on. To turn off the

air conditioning system, push the “A/C”

switch again.

During operation of the air conditioner, you

may notice slight changes in engine

speed. These changes are normal, the

system is designed so that the compressor

turns on or off to maintain the desired tem-

perature.

Less operation of the compressor results

in better fuel economy.

(g)(f)

Audio Systems:

4-27

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

System Operating Instructions

Natural ventilation

Select “VENTILATION” and “FRESH AIR”,

the temperature selector to the desired

temperature position, and the blower

speed selector to “OFF”. Fresh air will flow

through the vehicle during driving.

Forced ventilation

The control settings are the same as for

natural ventilation except you set the

blower speed selector to a position other

than “OFF”.

Normal heating (using outside air)

Select “HEAT” and “FRESH AIR”, the tem-

perature selector to the desired tempera-

ture position and the blower speed selector

to the desired blower speed position. Set-

ting the blower speed selector to a higher

blower speed position increases heating

efficiency.

Quick heating (using recirculated air)

The control settings are the same as for

normal heating except you select “RECIR-

CULATED AIR”. If you use this heating

method for an extended period of time, the

air in the vehicle can become contami-

nated and the windows can become misty.

Therefore, use this method only for quick

heating and change to the normal heating

method as soon as possible.

Head cooled/Feet warmed heating

Select “BI-LEVEL” and “FRESH AIR”, the

temperature selector to the desired tem-

perature position, and the blower speed

selector to the desired blower speed posi-

tion. Unless the temperature selector is in

the fully COLD position or fully HOT posi-

tion, the air that comes out of the center

and side outlets will be cooler than the air

that comes out of the floor outlets.

Normal cooling

Turn on the “A/C” switch, set the air flow

selector to “VENTILATION”, the tempera-

ture selector to the desired temperature

position and the blower speed selector to

the desired blower speed position. Setting

the blower speed selector to a higher

blower speed position increases cooling

efficiency.

You can switch the air intake selector to

either “FRESH AIR” or “RECIRCULATED

AIR” as you desire. Choosing “RECIRCU-

LATED AIR” increases cooling efficiency.

Quick cooling (using recirculated air)

The control settings are the same as for

normal cooling except you select “RECIR-

CULATED AIR” and the highest blower

speed.

NOTE:

• If you select “RECIRCULATED AIR” for

an extended period of time, the air in the

vehicle can become contaminated.

Therefore, you should occasionally

select “FRESH AIR”.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sun

with the windows closed, it will cool

faster if you open the windows briefly

while you operate the air conditioner with

the air intake selector at “FRESH AIR”

and the blower at high speed.

Dehumidifying

Turn on the “A/C” switch, set the air flow

selector to a desired air flow selector posi-

tion, and select “FRESH AIR”, the temper-

ature selector to the desired temperature

position, and the blower speed selector to

the desired blower speed position.

NOTE:

Because the air conditioner dehumidifies

the air, turning it on will help keep the win-

dows clear, even when blowing heated air

using the “DEFROST” or “HEAT &

DEFROST” functions.

Audio Systems:

4-28

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

79J070

NOTE:

If you need maximum defrosting:

• select “DEFROST” and “FRESH AIR”,

• turn on the “A/C” switch,

• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,

• adjust the temperature selector to the

HOT end, and

• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

Maintenance

If you do not use the air conditioner for a

long period, such as during winter, it may

not give the best performance when you

start using it again. To help maintain opti-

mum performance and durability of your air

conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.

Operate the air conditioner at least once a

month for one minute with the engine

idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil

and helps protect the internal components.

Your air conditioner is equipped with air fil-

ters. Clean or replace them as specified in

the “Maintenance Schedule” in the

“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” sec-

tion. Have this job done by your SUZUKI

dealer as the lower glove box must be low-

ered for this job.

NOTE:

Your vehicle uses the air conditioning

refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called

“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around

1993 for automotive applications. Other

refrigerants are available, including recy-

cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used

in your vehicle.

Automatic Heating and Air

Conditioning System

(Climate Control)

Description of Controls

80J095

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

Using the wrong refrigerant may

damage your air conditioning sys-

tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or

replace the R-134a with other refrig-

erants.

(1) (2) (3)

Audio Systems:

4-29

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Temperature selector/Air conditioning

switch (1)

80J096

This is used to select the temperature by

turning the selector.

Also, this is used to turn on and off the air

conditioning system by pushing the switch.

To turn on the air conditioning system,

push in the switch and the A/C indicator

light (4) will come on. To turn off the air

conditioning system, push in the switch

again and the A/C indicator light (4) will go

off.

NOTE:

If the A/C indicator light (4) blinks, there is

a problem in the heating system and/or air

conditioning system. You should have the

system inspected by an authorized

SUZUKI dealer.

Blower speed selector/Air intake selec-

tor (2)

79J096

This is used to turn on the blower and to

select blower speed.

If the selector is in “AUTO” position, the

blower speed will vary as the climate con-

trol system maintains the selected temper-

ature.

Also, this is used to select the following

modes by pushing the selector.

65D493

FRESH AIR

When this mode is selected, the indicator

light (a) will come on and outside air is

used.

RECIRCULATED AIR

When this mode is selected, the indicator

light (b) will come on, outside air is shut out

and inside air is recirculated. This mode is

suitable when driving through the polluted

air such as a tunnel, or attempting to

quickly cool down.

“FRESH AIR” and “RECIRCULATED AIR”

are switched alternately each time the air

intake selector is pushed.

(4)

EXAMPLE

(a) (b)

Audio Systems:

4-30

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Air flow selector (3)

79J097

AUTO (h)

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

various outlets automatically.

Ventilation (c)

79J065

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the center and side air outlets.

Bi-level (d)

79J066

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and cooler air comes out

of the center and side outlets. When the

temperature selector (1) is in the fully

COLD position or fully HOT position, how-

ever, the air from the floor outlets and the

air from the center and side outlets will be

the same temperature.

Heat (e)

79J067

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets and the side outlets, also

comes out of the windshield defroster out-

lets and the side defroster outlets slightly.

Heat & defrost (f)

79J068

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the floor outlets, the windshield defroster

outlets, the side defroster outlets and the

side outlets.

Defrost (g)

79J069

Temperature-controlled air comes out of

the windshield defroster outlets, the side

defroster outlets and the side outlets.

NOTE:

When the air flow selector (3) is turned

either to “Heat & defrost (f)” or “Defrost

(g)”, the air conditioning system will come

on and the “FRESH AIR” mode will be

selected automatically. But in very cold

weather, the air conditioning system will

not turn on.

(c)

(d) (e)

(f)

(g)

(h)

Audio Systems:

4-31

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

System Operating Instructions

Automatic operation

80J097

You can let the climate control system work

automatically. To set the system in fully-

automatic operation, follow the procedure

below.

1) Set the desired temperature by turning

the temperature selector (1).

2) Turn the blower speed selector (2) to

the “AUTO” position.

3) Turn the air flow selector (3) to the

“AUTO” position.

Then the blower speed selector/air intake

selector (2) and air flow selector (3) are

controlled automatically to maintain the set

temperature.

The air conditioning switch (1) is to be

selected manually according to your taste.

When you turn the air conditioning switch

off, the climate control system cannot

lower the inside temperature below outside

temperature.

To turn the climate control system off, turn

the blower speed selector (2) to the “OFF”

position

NOTE:

• To find your comfortable zone, start with

the 75°F (25°C) setting.

• If you turn the temperature selector (1) to

the highest or lowest limit, the climate

control system will operate at the maxi-

mum cooling or heating and the blower

will run at nearly full speed.

• To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather

or hot air in hot weather, the system will

delay turning on the blower until warmed

or chilled air is available.

• If your vehicle has been left in the sun

with the windows closed, it will cool

faster if you open the windows briefly.

• Even under the automatic operation, you

can set some of the blower speed selec-

tor/air intake selector (2) and air flow

selector (3) into manual mode. Then the

manually selected function is maintained

preferentially, and the other functions

remain under automatic operation.

• To return the air intake selector (2) to

automatic operation when both the

blower speed selector (2) and the air

flow selector (3) are in the “AUTO” posi-

tion, turn either the selector (2) or (3) to

a position other than “AUTO”, then turn

to the “AUTO” position again.

79J071

Be careful not to cover the interior temper-

ature sensor (F) between the steering

wheel and the climate control panel, or the

solar sensor (G) located at the top of the

driver’s side dashboard. These sensors

are used by the automatic system to regu-

late temperature.

Manual operation

You can manually control the climate con-

trol system. Set the selectors to your

desired position.

EXAMPLE

(2) (3)(1)

(G)

(F)

EXAMPLE

Audio Systems:

4-32

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

79J070

NOTE:

If you need maximum defrosting:

• set the air flow selector to “DEFROST”

(the air conditioning system will come on

and the “FRESH AIR” mode will be

selected automatically),

• set the blower speed selector to HIGH,

• adjust the temperature selector to the

HOT end, and

• adjust the side outlets so the air blows

on the side windows.

Maintenance

If you do not use the air conditioner for a

long period, such as during winter, it may

not give the best performance when you

start using it again. To help maintain opti-

mum performance and durability of your air

conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.

Operate the air conditioner at least once a

month for one minute with the engine

idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil

and helps protect the internal components.

NOTE:

Your vehicle uses the air conditioning

refrigerant HFC-134a, commonly called

“R-134a”. R-134a replaced R-12 around

1993 for automotive applications. Other

refrigerants are available, including recy-

cled R-12, but only R-134a should be used

in your vehicle.

Audio Systems

There are two types of audio system as

shown below:

Type 1

80J059

AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER

WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

CAUTION

Using the wrong refrigerant may

damage your air conditioning sys-

tem. Use R-134a only. Do not mix or

replace the R-134a with other refrig-

erants.

Audio Systems:

4-33

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Type 2

80J060

AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER

WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Precautions

• When the inside of the car is very cold

and the player is used soon after switch-

ing on the heater, moisture may form on

the disc or the optical parts of the player

and proper playback may not be possi-

ble. If moisture forms on the disc, wipe it

off with a soft cloth. If moisture forms on

the optical parts of the player, do not use

the player for about one hour, this will

allow the condensation to disappear nor-

mally.

• Driving on extremely bumpy roads which

cause severe vibrations may cause

sound to skip.

• This unit uses a precision mechanism.

Even in the event that trouble arises,

never open the case, disassemble the

unit, or lubricate the rotating parts.

Please bring the unit to an authorized

SUZUKI dealer or a Clarion service

Department.

Cautions on Handling

52D274

This unit has been designed specifically for

playback of compact discs bearing the

mark (A).

No other discs can be played.

52D275

To remove the compact disc from its stor-

age case, press down on the center of the

case and lift the disc out, holding it care-

fully by the edges.

Always handle the compact disc by the

edges.

(A)

Removing the disc Proper way to hold

the compact disc

Audio Systems:

4-34

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Never touch the surface.

52D347

To remove fingermarks and dust, use a

soft cloth, and wipe in a straight line from

the center of the compact disc to the cir-

cumference.

52D277

New discs may have some roughness

around the edges. The unit may not work

or the sound may skip if such discs are

used. Use a ball-point pen (B), etc. to

remove the roughness (C) from edges of

the disc before insertion inside the unit.

52D348

Never stick labels on the surface of the

compact disc or mark the surface with a

pencil or pen.

52D349

Do not use any solvents such as commer-

cially available cleaners, anti-static spray,

or thinner to clean compact discs.

52D350

Do not use compact discs that have large

scratches, are misshaped, or cracked, etc.

Use of such discs will cause damage or

prevent the system from operating prop-

erly.

52D351

Do not expose compact discs to direct sun-

light or any heat source.

NOTE:

• Do not use commercially available CD

protection sheets or discs equipped with

stabilizers, etc.

These may get caught in the internal

mechanism and damage the disc.

• CD-R discs may not be able to playback

in this unit due to the recording condi-

tions.

• CD-RW discs can not playback in this

unit.

(B)

(C)

Audio Systems:

4-35

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Basic Operations

80J061

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

(1) (2)

(3) (4)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

(1) Power on/off knob

Volume control knob

(2) Tone/balance/fader control knob

(3) Preset button 5

(4) Preset button 6

Audio Systems:

4-36

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Turning power on/off

Press the power on/off knob (1).

The unit starts in the function mode it was

in when the power was turned off last.

Adjusting the volume

Turn the volume control knob (1).

Turning it clockwise increases the volume;

turning it counterclockwise decreases the

volume.

NOTE:

While driving, adjust the volume to an

extent that sound and/or noise coming

from outside the car can be heard.

Adjusting bass/treble/balance/fader

1) Press the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2).

Each time it is pressed, sound adjust-

ment is changed as follows:

66J224

2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2) to adjust the sound.

Adjusting the AVC (Auto volume con-

trol)

The Automatic Volume Control (AVC) func-

tion automatically adjusts (increases/

decreases) the sound volume in accor-

dance with vehicle speed. The AVC control

is provided with three selectable levels

(LEVEL OFF, 1, 2, 3). The range of volume

adjustment increases together with the

LEVEL number,

1) Press the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2) until the AVC adjustment mode

is selected.

2) Turn the tone/balance/fader control

knob (2) to select the desired AVC

adjustment level. (Initial setting: LEVEL

Adjusting the contrast of the display

1) Press the tone/balance/fader/control

knob (2) and preset button 5 (3), preset

button 6 (4) simultaneously.

2) To adjust the contrast of the display,

turn the power on/off knob (1).

Cancel the dimmer condition

Each time you press the power on/off knob

(1) for two seconds with the lighting switch

on, the background brightness of the audio

display will switch between normal and

dimmed.

Bass adjustment (BASS 0)

Treble adjustment (TREBLE 0)

Balance adjustment (BALANCE 0)

Fader adjustment (FADER 0)

AVC adjustment (AVC LEVEL 2)

Original mode

Audio Systems:

4-37

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Listening to the Radio

80J062

(1)

(4)

(6) (2)

(3)

(5)

(1)

(4)

(6) (2)

(3)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Display

66J097

(1) Band switch button (FM/AM)

(2) Seek up button

(3) Seek down button

(4) Manual tuning knob

(5) Preset buttons (1 to 6)

(6) Auto store button (AS)/

Scan button (SCAN)

(A) Band

(B) Preset channel number

(D) Frequency

(A) (B)

(C)

(D)

Audio Systems:

4-38

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Selecting the reception band

Press the band switch button (1).

Each time the button is pressed, the recep-

tion band is switched as follows:

66J098

Seek tuning

Press the seek up button (2) or the seek

down button (3).

The unit stops searching for a station at a

frequency where a broadcast station is

available.

Manual tuning

Turn the manual tuning knob (4).

The frequency being received is displayed.

Preset memory

1) Select the desired station.

2) Select the preset button (5) to which

you want to store the station and press

and hold the button for 2 seconds or

longer.

Auto store

Press and hold the auto store button (6) for

2 seconds or longer.

Six stations in total are automatically

stored to the preset buttons (5) in sequen-

tial order, starting from the lower frequen-

cies.

NOTE:

• When the auto store is performed, the

station previously stored in the memory

at the position is overwritten.

• When there are fewer than 6 stations

that can be stored even if 2 rounds of

auto store operation are performed, the

stations previously stored at the remain-

ing preset buttons (5) are not overwrit-

ten.

Scan tuning

1) Press the scan button (6).

Stations are automatically sought for in

a sequential order, starting from a sta-

tion being currently received, and scan

stops for 5 seconds at a frequency

where there is a station available.

2) Press the scan button (6) again to stop

scanning at the frequency being cur-

rently received.

Receiving a stereo broadcast station

If a stereo broadcast station is received,

the stereo indicator will light.

Radio Reception

Radio reception can be affected by envi-

ronment, atmospheric conditions, or radio

signal’s power and distance from the sta-

tion. Nearby mountains and buildings may

interfere or deflect radio reception, causing

poor reception. Poor reception or radio

static can also be caused by electric cur-

rent from overhead wires or high voltage

power lines.

Radio Antenna

SX4

63J055

The radio antenna on the roof is remov-

able. To remove the antenna, turn it coun-

terclockwise. To reinstall the antenna, turn

it clockwise firmly by hand.

EXAMPLE

Audio Systems:

4-39

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

SX4 SEDAN

The radio antenna wire is printed inside

the rear window.

Listening to a CD

52D274

• CDs or CD-ROMs carrying no mark (A)

cannot be used.

• Some discs previously recorded in CD-

R\CD-RW format may not be used.

52D291

• A CD is inserted with its label facing

upward.

• When there is a CD already loaded in

the unit, another CD cannot be loaded at

the same time. Do not use force when

inserting the CD into the CD insertion

slot.

• If a blank disc (non recorded CD-R) is

loaded in the unit, the disc will be

ejected.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the radio

antenna:

• Remove the antenna before using

an automatic car wash.

• Remove the antenna when it is pos-

sible for the antenna to hit some-

thing such as a low ceiling in a

parking garage or putting a car

cover over your car.

• Remove the antenna before put-

ting a car cover over your vehicle.

CAUTION

• Do not attach any metal objects to

the rear window glass, or place

metallic film near it. Either of these

conditions may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

• When cleaning the inside of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the rear window

antenna. Wipe the rear window

lightly along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

(A)

CAUTION

• Never insert your finger or hand

into the CD insertion slot. Never

insert foreign objects.

• Never insert a CD with glue coming

out from adhesive tape or a rental

CD label or with a trace indicating

that adhesive tape or a rental CD

label has been removed. This may

cause the CD not to eject or result

in a malfunction.

Audio Systems:

4-40

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Type 1

AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built in CD Player)

80J063

(3)

(6)

(4)

(2)

(1)

(5)

Display

66J100

(1) CD insertion slot

(2) CD eject button

(3) Disc button (CD/AUX)

(4) Track up button/Fast forward button

(5) Track down button/Rewind button

(6) Repeat button (RPT)

(A) Mode indicator

(B) Track number

(D) Repeat indicator

(A) (B) (C)

(D)

Audio Systems:

4-41

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

NOTE:

About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)

• No adapter is required to play a single

CD.

• A single CD is inserted from the center

of the CD insertion slot.

• Since an ejected single CD is not auto-

matically reloaded, be sure to remove

the ejected single CD.

Loading a CD

Insert a CD in the CD insertion slot (1).

When a CD is loaded, play starts and the

CD indicator (A) lights.

Ejecting a CD

Press the CD eject button (2).

If you left a CD ejected for a period of

about 15 seconds, it will be automatically

drawn inside the unit. (Auto reload func-

tion)

The backup eject function:

This function allows you to eject a CD with

the power turned off by pressing the CD

eject button (2).

Listening to a CD

When a CD is inserted, it is automatically

played back.

When a CD is already inside the unit,

press the disc button (3) to play back the

CD. When a CD is inside the unit, the CD

indicator (A) is lit on the display unit.

Selecting a track

• Press the track up button (4) to listen to

the next track.

• Press the track down button (5) twice to

listen to the previous track.

When the track down button (5) is

pressed once, the track being currently

played will return to the beginning.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

• Hold in the fast forward button (4) to

advance a track rapidly.

• Hold in the rewind button (5) to rewind a

track.

Repeat play

Press the repeat button (6).

The repeat indicator (D) lights and the

track currently being played is played

repeatedly.

Press the repeat button (6) again to cancel

repeat play.

CAUTION

If you forcefully try to push an ejected

CD inside the unit before auto reload-

ing, the disc surface might be

scratched.

Audio Systems:

4-42

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Type 2

AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL (Built-in CD Changer)

66J064

(2)

(5)

(1)

(8) (6)

(4)

(3)

(7)

Display

66J102

(1) Load button (LOAD)

(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)

(3) CD insertion slot

(4) CD eject button

(5) Disc button (CD/AUX)

(6) Track up button/Fast forward button

(7) Track down button/Rewind button

(8) Repeat button (RPT)

(A) Mode indicator

(B) Disc number

(D) Play time

(E) CD indicator

(F) Repeat indicator

(A) (C) (D)

(F)

(B) (E)

Audio Systems:

4-43

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

NOTE:

About Single CDs (8 cm CDs)

• Since the unit is not compatible with a

single CD, do not load it into the unit.

• Keep in mind the fact that a single CD

cannot be played even using a single CD

adaptor for the unit.

• When a single CD is loaded into the unit

accidentally, it will be ejected immedi-

ately. Please be sure to remove it.

If you forcefully try to push it into the unit

without removing it, the CD cannot be

ejected. This will result in a damage to

the mechanism. Please never do this.

Loading one CD

1) Press the load button (1), then press

one of the disc select buttons (2) that

corresponds to the slot into which you

want to load a CD.

66J143

Both the indication “In” and the selected

disc number in the CD indicator will blink

for about 15 seconds.

2) Load the CD into the CD insertion slot

(3). When the CD is loaded, play starts.

The disk number in the CD indicator will

light.

Loading multiple CDs

1) Press the load button (1) for 2 seconds

or longer.

The indication “CD ALL” appears in the

display, and then the indication “In” and

a disc number in the CD indicator will

blink for about 15 seconds.

2) Load a CD into the CD insertion slot

(3).

3) The indication “In” and the next disc

number will blink in the display. Load

the next CD.

4) After loading the required number of

CD’s, press any disc select button (2) to

select the desired CD to listen to. If no

select button is pressed, play will start

from the first loaded CD.

Only the numbers in the CD indicator that

correspond to the loaded slots will light.

Ejecting one CD

1) Select the CD you want to remove with

the disc select buttons (2).

2) Press the CD eject button (4).

If you leave the ejected CD without

removing it, it will be drawn into the unit

automatically after about 15 seconds.

(Auto reload function)

The buck up eject mechanism:

This function allows you to eject the CD

loaded in the unit with the unit turned off

only by pressing the CD eject button (4).

CAUTION

You can load a CD only while the indi-

cation “In” is blinking for about 15

seconds. During that period, the

shutter located in the depth of the CD

insertion slot (3) is opened. After 15

seconds time has elapsed, the indi-

cation “In” disappears from the dis-

play and the shutter closes, making it

impossible to load a CD. If you try to

load the CD with the shutter closed,

the CD may damage the shutter.

Never do this.

Audio Systems:

4-44

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Ejecting all the CDs

Press the CD eject button (4) for 2 seconds

or longer. All the CDs will be ejected from

the unit in a sequential manner.

• Please prepare a location where

removed CDs can be stored.

• If you leave the ejected CD without

removing it, it will be drawn into the unit

automatically after about 15 seconds.

(Auto reload function)

The buck up eject mechanism:

This function allows you to eject the CD

loaded in the unit with the unit turned off

only by pressing the CD eject button (4).

Listening to a CD

1) When a CD is inserted, it is automati-

cally played back.

When a CD is already inside the unit,

press the disc button (5) to play back

the CD. When a CD is inside the unit,

the CD indicator (A) is lit on the display

unit.

2) If you want to play another CD, select it

with the disc select buttons (2).

Play starts from the point on the disc

that the unit played last (Last position

memory).

Selecting a track

• Press the track up button (6) to listen to

the next track.

• Press the track down button (7) twice to

listen to the previous track.

When the track down button (7) is

pressed once, the track being currently

played will return to the beginning.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

• Hold in the fast forward button (6) to

advance a track rapidly.

• Hold in the rewind button (7) to rewind a

track.

Repeat play

Press the repeat button (8).

Each time the button is pressed, repeat

play mode changes as follows:

66J144

NOTE:

This operation should be performed within

2 seconds.

To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-

ton (8) several times to change the repeat

play mode to OFF.

• TRACK REPEAT

The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in

the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (F) lights.

The track currently being played is

played repeatedly.

• DISC REPEAT

The indication “DISC RPT” appears in

the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (F) lights.

When all the tracks on the disc currently

being played finish playing, play starts

again at the beginning of the disc.

CAUTION

If you try to push an ejected CD

inside the unit forcibly before auto

reloading, the disc surface might be

scratched.

TRACK REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

OFF

Audio Systems:

4-45

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Listening to an MP3/WMA Disc

80J065

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(2)

(5)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Display (Type 1)

66J104

Display (Type 2)

66J105

(1) Sound control knob

(2) Repeat button (RPT)

(3) Track up button/Fast forward button

(4) Track down button/Rewind button

(5) Display button (DISP)

(A) Folder number

(B) Track number

(D) Repeat indicator

(E) WMA indicator

(F) MP3 indicator

(G) CD indicator

(A) (B)

(E) (D)

(C)

(F)

(A) (B) (G)

(E) (D)

(C)

(F)

Audio Systems:

4-46

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

MP3/WMA MODE

Selecting a folder

Turn the sound control knob (1) to select a

folder.

Repeat play

Press the repeat button (2).

Each time the button is pressed, repeat

play mode changes as follows:

Type 1

66J128

Type 2

66J145

NOTE:

This operation should be performed within

2 seconds.

To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-

ton (2) several times to change the repeat

play mode to OFF.

• TRACK REPEAT

The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in

the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (D) lights.

The track currently being played is

played repeatedly.

• FOLDER REPEAT

The indication “FOLDER RPT” appears

in the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (D) lights.

All the tracks in the folder currently being

played are played repeatedly.

• DISC REPEAT

The indication “DISC RPT” appears in

the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (D) lights.

When all the tracks on the disc currently

being played finish playing, play starts

again at the beginning of the disc.

Selecting a track

• Press the track up button (3) to listen to

the next track.

• Press the track down button (4) twice to

listen to the previous track.

When the track down button (4) is

pressed once, the track currently being

played will start again at the beginning.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to

advance a track rapidly.

• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a

track.

Displaying CD titles

Press the display button (5).

Each time the button is pressed, the title

changes as follows:

66J146

Forwarding a title

If there is a title with 12 letters or more,

each press will show next letters in the dis-

play. (No scrolling is made.)

Press and hold the display button (5) for 2

seconds or longer. A title is changed.

TRACK REPEAT

FOLDER REPEAT

OFF

TRACK REPEAT FOLDER REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

OFF

TRACK TITLE

FOLDER TITLE

ARTIST TITLE

OFF

FILE TITLEALBUM TITLE

Audio Systems:

4-47

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option)

80J066

(5)

(2)

(8)

(6)

(3)

(4)

(7)

(1)

(5)

(2)

(8)

(6)

(3)

(4)

(7)

(1)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Display

66J107

(1) XM button

(2) Category button (CAT)

(3) Seek up button

(4) Seek down button

(5) Manual tuning knob

(6) Display button (DISP)

(7) Preset button (1 to 6)

(8) Scan button (SCAN)

(A) Band

(B) Channel number

If you want to purchase XM Satellite Radio

Service, contact your SUZUKI dealer.

It is necessary to buy a special tuner to

receive XM broadcasting.

Your vehicle is capable of receiving XM

Satellite Radio anywhere in the United

States except Hawaii, Alaska, and Can-

ada.

(A) (B)

(C)

Audio Systems:

4-48

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

XM MODE

Selecting a band

Press the XM button (1).

Each time the button is pressed, the band

changes in the following order.

66J129

Selecting a category

Press the seek up button (3) or the seek

down button (4). The category is changed.

Turning the category function on/off

Press and hold the category button (2) for

2 seconds or longer, and “CATEGORY

ON” appears on the display, the CAT indi-

cator (c) lights up and the CATEGORY

function is activated.

Press and hold the category button (2) for

2 seconds or longer again, and “CATE-

GORY OFF” appears on the display and

the CAT indicator turns off, indicating that

the CATEGORY function has been turned

off.

NOTE:

The first time you use the radio, turn the

category function on.

Selecting a category

Press the seek up button (3) or seek down

button (4) to select a category.

Displaying the category

Press the category button (2) to have the

currently selected category appear on the

display.

Selecting a channel

Turn the manual tuning knob (5) to select a

channel.

NOTE:

When the category function is on, only

those channels included in the selected

category can be selected.

Selecting the item to be displayed

Press the display button (6).

Each time the button is pressed, the item

on display changes in the following order.

66J130

Preset memory

1) Select the desired station.

2) Select the preset button (7) to which

you want to store the station and press

and hold the button for 2 seconds or

longer.

Scan tuning

1) Press the scan button (8).

Stations are automatically searched for

in a sequential order, starting from the

station being currently received, and

scan tuning stops for 5 seconds at the

frequency where there is a station avail-

able.

2) Press the scan button (8) again to stop

scanning at the frequency currently

being received.

Satellite Radio Reception

Satellite radio receives signals from two

satellites in orbit over the equator. There-

fore, satellite radio reception can be inter-

rupted when there are objects south of

your vehicle. To help compensate for this,

ground-based repeaters are placed in

major metropolitan areas, but depending

on the geographic situation (for example, if

mountains or buildings are on the south

side of your vehicle), you may experience

reception problems.

XM1 XM2 XM3

CH NUMBER CH NAME

NAMETITLE

Audio Systems:

4-49

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Listening to Audio for AUX (Option)

80J067

(1)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Display

66J221

(1) Aux button (CD/AUX)

(A) Mode indicator

Aux function

This system has an external input terminal

so you can listen to audio from an external

device connected to this unit.

Press the aux button (1).

Each time the button is pressed, the

selected mode is switched as follows:

66J123

(A)

CD AUX

4-50

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer (Option)

80J068

(6)

(5)

(1)

(3)

(4)

(1)

(2)

(6)

(5)

(3)

(4)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Display

66J113

(1) Disc button (CD/AUX)

(2) Disc select buttons (1 to 6)

(3) Track up button/Fast forward button

(4) Track down button/Rewind button

(5) Repeat button (RPT)

(6) Category button (CAT)

(A) Mode indicator

(B) Disc number

(D) Play time

(E) Repeat indicator

(F) Random indicator

(G) CD changer number

(A) (B)

(E)

(D)

(F)

(C)

(G)

4-51

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Selecting a CD changer mode

Press the disc button (1).

Each time the button is pressed, the

selected CD plays as follows:

52D300

• When only one CD changer is con-

nected to this unit, CD changer 2 is

skipped.

• When no CD is loaded in the built-in CD

player, the built-in CD player is skipped.

Selecting a disc

Press the disc select button (2) corre-

sponding to the disc number you want to

listen to.

Play starts from the first track on the disc. If

a disc number having no disc is pressed,

the selection will be invalid.

Selecting a track

• Press the track up button (3) to listen to

the next track.

• Press the track down button (4) twice to

listen to the previous track.

When the track down button (4) is

pressed once, the track currently being

played will start again at the beginning.

Fast forwarding/Rewinding a track

• Hold in the fast forward button (3) to

advance a track rapidly.

• Hold in the rewind button (4) to rewind a

track.

Random play

Press the category button (6).

Each time the button is pressed, the mode

changes in the following order.

66J131

NOTE:

This operation should be performed within

2 seconds.

To cancel random play, press the category

button (6) several times to change the ran-

dom play mode to OFF.

• TRACK RANDOM

The tracks in the disc that is loaded are

played at random.

• DISC RANDOM

The tracks in all discs are played at ran-

dom.

NOTE:

The random play can be operated with the

External CD Changer (Option) only.

Built-in CD player

CD changer 1

CD changer 2

TRACK RANDOM

DISC RANDOM

OFF

4-52

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Repeat play

Press the repeat button (5).

Each time the button is pressed, repeat

play mode changes as follows:

66J144

NOTE:

This operation should be performed within

2 seconds.

To cancel repeat play, press the repeat but-

ton (5) several times to change the repeat

play mode to OFF.

• TRACK REPEAT

The indication “TRACK RPT” appears in

the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (E) lights.

The track being currently played is

played repeatedly.

• DISC REPEAT

The indication “DISC RPT” appears in

the display for 2 seconds and then the

repeat indicator (E) lights.

When all the tracks on a disc being cur-

rently played finish playing, play starts

again at the beginning of the disc.

TRACK REPEAT

DISC REPEAT

OFF

4-53

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Remote Audio Controls

(if equipped)

80J103

You can control basic functions of the

audio system with the switches on the

steering wheel.

To control the volume:

• To increase the volume, push the upper

part of the switch (1). The volume contin-

ues to increase until you release the

switch.

• To decrease the volume, push the lower

part of the switch (1). The volume contin-

ues to decrease until you release the

switch.

• To mute, push the switch (2).

To select the mode (AM1, AM2, FM1, FM2,

XM (option), CD, External CD-changer

(option), AUX (option)), push the switch

(3).

You can also turn on the audio system by

pushing the switch (3).

To change the radio station:

• To advance to the next preset station,

push the upper part of the switch (4)

briefly.

• To select the previous preset station,

push the lower part of the switch (4)

briefly.

• To scan to a higher frequency radio sta-

tion, push and hold the upper part of the

switch (4).

• To scan to a lower frequency radio sta-

tion, push and hold the lower part of the

switch (4).

To change the selection on a CD:

• To advance to the next track on a CD,

push the upper part of the switch (4)

briefly.

• To select the previous track on a CD,

push the lower part of the switch (4).

(1)

(2) (3)

(4)

4-54

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Anti-Theft Feature

80J069

(1)

(2)

(3)

(1)

(2)

(3)

Type 1 AM/FM/XM CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

Type 2 AM/FM/XM 6-CD PLAYER WITH CD CHANGER CONTROL

(1) Power on/off knob

(2) Track up button/Fast forward button

(3) Preset buttons (1 to 6)

The anti-theft feature is intended to dis-

courage theft or the audio system by pre-

venting the system from operating when it

is moved to a different vehicle.

This feature works by allowing you to enter

a Personal Identification Number (PIN).

When the audio system is disconnected

from its power source, such as when the

audio system is removed or the battery is

disconnected, the system will not operate

again unless the PIN is reentered.

4-55

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Setting the Anti-Theft Function

1) Turn off the power by pressing the

power on/off knob (1).

66J118

2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while

pressing and holding the track up but-

ton (2). The “ENTRY 0000” will blink

and the audio system enter PIN-input

mode.

NOTE:

Establish your PIN by combining numbers

from 1 to 6 into any 4-digit number. If you

forget your PIN, when you remove the bat-

tery for repair etc., you will no longer be

able to operate the audio system.

66J117

3) Input the four digit PIN using preset but-

tons 1 to 6.

66J118

4) After you enter your four digit PIN, the

display will return to “0000”.

66J117

5) Input the same 4-digit number you pre-

viously entered.

66J120

6) The power of the audio system will turn

off.

NOTE:

Write down your PIN for the future use.

Canceling Your Established PIN

Setting

This operation is to be done when you

want to cancel the anti-theft function or

change your PIN.

1) Turn off the power by pressing the

power on/off knob (1).

66J121

2) Press the power on/off knob (1) while

pressing and holding the track up but-

ton (2). The “DELETE 0000” will blink

and the audio system will enter the can-

cel mode.

EXAMPLE

4-56

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

66J124

3) Input your PIN. The power of the audio

system will turn off and your PIN will be

deleted.

To change your PIN, first delete your

current PIN, then set a new one.

Confirming Your Personal Identifi-

cation Number (PIN)

When the main power source is discon-

nected such as when you exchange your

battery, etc, you will have to confirm your

PIN to be able to use the audio system.

To confirm your PIN:

66J122

1) Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”

position.

66J125

2) Input your PIN.

If the PIN that you input matches the

registered PIN, the power of the audio

system will turn off, and you will be able

to operate the audio system.

NOTE:

• If you input your PIN incorrectly, “----” will

be displayed and the anti-theft function

lock mode is entered. If you enter an

incorrect PIN fewer than 6 times, the

locking time will be for 15 seconds; if you

enter an incorrect PIN more than 6

times, the locking time will be for 15 min-

utes.

• If you forget your PIN and enter a wrong

PIN, you can not perform any further

operation.

EXAMPLE

4-57

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Troubleshooting

Applicable to every device

Radio

Phenomenon Cause Remedy

Power is not turned on.

(No sound is produced)

Fuse is blown. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Connections are not properly made. Contact your authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Phenomenon Cause Remedy

Too much noise. Not tuned correctly to the frequency of a sta-

tion.

Tune correctly to the station frequency.

Stations cannot be selected by

seek tuning.

There is no station with strong radio waves. Select stations by manual tuning.

Phenomenon Cause Remedy

Compact disc cannot be loaded. Another compact disc is already loaded. Eject the compact disc before loading a new

one.

Sound skips or is noisy. Compact disc is dirty. Clean the compact disc with a soft cloth.

Compact disc is heavily scratched or warped. Replace with a compact disc with no scratches.

Sound is bad directly after power

is turned on.

Water droplets may form on the internal lens

when the car is parked in a humid place.

Let dry for about 1 hour with the power on.

4-58

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

Error display

This unit has a number of self-diagnostic functions to protect the system.

If a problem should occur, the display shows the type of error. Refer to the table below and take proper measures to correct the problem.

If the problem is corrected, the unit will operate normally.

If an error display not listed above appears, turn off the unit and contact your SUZUKI dealer.

Error display Measures to be taken

CD/CD changer “Mechanical error”.

This error display indicates a mechanical failure in the CD changer

(failure to change or eject a disc).

The mechanism is probably damaged. Contact your authorized

SUZUKI dealer.

CD/CD changer “Focus error”.

The pick-up-focus is not properly functioning during playback due to

damage on the disc or for other reasons.

Check disc for damage.

CD/CD changer “Disc error”.

The CD is inserted upside down or only an eight-centimeter CD

adapter is equipped.

Check disc for correct loading.

4-59

INSTRUMENT PANEL

80J21-03E

MEMO

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

60G407

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parking Brake Lever ........................................................... 5-1

Pedals ................................................................................... 5-1

Gearshift Lever .................................................................... 5-2

Fuel Filler Cap ..................................................................... 5-3

Folding Rear Seats (SX4) ................................................... 5-4

Sun Visor ............................................................................. 5-8

Interior Light Switch ........................................................... 5-8

Spot Light ............................................................................ 5-9

Assist Grips (if equipped) .................................................. 5-9

Eyeglasses Holder (if equipped) ........................................ 5-10

Engine Hood ........................................................................ 5-10

Cup Holder and Storage Area (if equipped) ..................... 5-11

Accessory Socket (if equipped) ......................................... 5-11

Frame Hooks ....................................................................... 5-12

Tire Changing Tool ............................................................. 5-13

Luggage Compartment Cover (if equipped) ..................... 5-14

Luggage Compartment Light (SX4) ................................... 5-15

Trunk Light (SX4 SEDAN) ................................................... 5-15

Radio Antenna ..................................................................... 5-16

Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors (if equipped) ............... 5-16

5-1

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Parking Brake Lever

52D122

(1) To set

(2) To release

(3) To release

The parking brake lever is located between

the seats. To set the parking brake, hold

the brake pedal down and pull the parking

brake lever all the way up. To release the

parking brake, hold the brake pedal down,

pull up slightly on the parking brake lever,

push the button on the end of the lever with

your thumb and lower the lever to its origi-

nal position.

For automatic transaxle vehicles, always

set the parking brake before moving the

gearshift lever to the “P” (Park) position. If

you park on an incline and shift into “P”

before you set the parking brake, the

weight of the vehicle may make it difficult to

shift out of “P” when you are ready to drive

the vehicle. When preparing to drive the

vehicle, move the gearshift lever out of the

“P” position before releasing the parking

brake.

Pedals

Manual transaxle

79J072

Automatic transaxle

79J154

WARNING

• Never drive your vehicle with the

parking brake set: rear brake effec-

tiveness can be reduced from over-

heating, brake life may be

shortened or permanent brake

damage may result.

• If the parking brake does not hold

the vehicle securely or does not

fully release, have your vehicle

inspected immediately by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer.

WARNING

Always set the parking brake fully

before leaving your vehicle or it may

roll, causing injury or damage. When

parking, make sure the gearshift

lever for manual transaxle vehicles is

in 1st gear or “R” (Reverse) and the

gearshift lever for automatic tran-

saxle vehicles is in “P” (Park).

Remember, even though the tran-

saxle is in gear or in Park, you must

set the parking brake fully.

(1) (2) (3)

EXAMPLE

(2) (3)

EXAMPLE

Parking Brake Lever: 6

Pedals: 6

5-2

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Clutch Pedal (1)

(For manual transaxle)

The clutch pedal is used to disengage the

drive to the wheels when starting the

engine, stopping or shifting the gearshift

lever. Depressing the pedal disengages

the clutch.

Brake Pedal (2)

Your SUZUKI vehicle is equipped with

either front and rear disc brakes or front

disc brakes and rear drum brakes.

Depressing the brake pedal applies both

sets of brakes.

You may hear occasional brake squeal

when you apply the brakes. This is a nor-

mal condition caused by environmental

factors such as cold, wet, snow, etc.

Accelerator Pedal (3)

This pedal controls the speed of the

engine. Depressing the accelerator pedal

increases power output and speed.

Gearshift Lever

Manual transaxle

63J051

Automatic transaxle

77J021

CAUTION

Do not drive with your foot resting on

the clutch pedal. It could result in

excessive clutch wear or clutch dam-

age.

WARNING

If brake squeal is excessive and

occurs each time the brakes are

applied, you should have the brakes

checked by your SUZUKI dealer.

WARNING

Do not “ride” the brakes by applying

them continuously or resting your

foot on the pedal. This will result in

overheating of the brakes which

could cause unpredictable braking

action, longer stopping distances or

permanent brake damage.

EXAMPLE

Pedals: 6

Gearshift Lever: 10

5-3

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Your vehicle is equipped with either a man-

ual transaxle or automatic transaxle. The

gearshift lever for each transaxle type is

shown. For details on how to use the tran-

saxle, refer to the “Using the Transaxle” in

“OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE” section.

Fuel Filler Cap

SX4

80JC060

79J049

SX4 SEDAN

56KN029

56KN030

EXAMPLE

Gearshift Lever: 10

Fuel Filler Cap: 5

5-4

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

The fuel filler cap is located on the left rear

side of the vehicle. The fuel filler door can

be unlocked by pulling up the opener lever

located on the outboard side of the driver’s

seat and can be locked by simply closing

the door.

60G069

To remove the fuel filler cap:

1) Open the fuel filler door.

2) Remove the cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

To reinstall the fuel filler cap:

1) Turn the cap clockwise until you hear

several clicks.

2) Close the fuel filler door.

Folding Rear Seats (SX4)

The rear seats of your vehicle can be

folded forward to provide additional cargo

space.

To fold the rear seats forward:

80J040

1) Hook the webbing of the outboard lap-

shoulder belts in the belt hangers.

WARNING

Remove the fuel filler cap slowly. The

fuel may be under pressure and may

spray out, causing injury.

Open Close

WARNING

Gasoline is extremely flammable. Do

not smoke when refueling, and make

sure there are no open flames or

sparks in the area.

WARNING

If you need to replace the fuel cap,

use a genuine SUZUKI cap. Use of an

improper cap can result in a malfunc-

tion of the fuel system or emission

control system. It may also result in

fuel leakage in the event of an acci-

dent.

CAUTION

• When you move a seatback, make

sure the belt webbing is hooked in

the seat belt hangers so the seat

belts are not caught by the seat-

back, seat hinge, or seat latch. This

helps prevent damage to the belt

system.

• Make sure the belt webbing is not

twisted.

EXAMPLE

Fuel Filler Cap: 5

Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-5

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

79J213

2) Stow the seat belt buckles of the center

and right seating position as shown in

the illustration.

3) Lower the adjustable head restraint

fully.

80J042

4) Pull the release lever on the top of each

split seat, and fold the seatbacks for-

ward.

63J057

5) Pull the lock release strap (1) rearward

to unlatch the seat cushion.

79J124

6) Fold the entire seat forward.

CAUTION

When you fold the rear seatback for-

ward, stow the seat belt buckles of

the center and right seating position

into the seat first. This helps prevent

being caught by the seat and being

damaged.

(1)

WARNING

When you unlatch the rear seat cush-

ion, be careful that your face or

hands are not injured from the seat

popping up.

Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-6

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

80J043

7) Push down the adjuster (2) to make the

strap slack, and then unhook the strap

by pushing down the hook (3).

80J044

8) Hook the strap (4) to the front seat head

restraint as shown in the illustration.

To return the seat to the normal position,

follow the procedure below.

79J126

1) Unhook the strap from the head

restraint and stow the strap to the back

of the seat cushion as shown in the

illustration. Make sure to adjust the

strap length to avoid any slack or twist.

(2)

(3)

(4)

CAUTION

When securing the folded rear seat

with a strap, adjust the strap length

so that the rear seat will not move.

WARNING

Luggage or other cargo should be

stowed in the luggage compartment

with the rear seat in an upright posi-

tion, whenever possible. If you need

to carry cargo in the passenger com-

partment with the rear seat back

folded forward, be sure to secure the

cargo or it may be thrown about,

causing injury. Never pile cargo

higher than the seatbacks.

Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-7

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

79J129

2) Pull down the seat cushion until it locks

into place.

63J130

3) Raise the seatback until it locks into

place.

WARNING

When returning the rear seat cushion

to the normal position, be careful that

your finger is not caught between the

lock and the floor.

CAUTION

• When returning the rear seat cush-

ion to the normal position, make

sure that there is nothing around

the striker. This prevents the seat

cushion from being locked

securely.

• When returning the rear seat cush-

ion to the normal position, make

sure that there is nothing under the

seat cushion. This prevents dam-

age to the seat cushion.

Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-8

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

After returning the seat, try moving the

seat and seatback to make sure they are

securely latched.

79J127

Sun Visor

79J161

The sun visors can be pulled down to block

glare coming through the windshield, or

they can be unhooked and turned to the

side to block glare coming through the side

window.

Interior Light Switch

64J104

The interior light switch has three posi-

tions, which functions as described below.

(1) The light comes on and stays on

regardless of whether the door is

open or closed.

(2) The light comes on when the door is

opened.

After closing all doors, the light will

remain on for about 15 seconds and

then fade out. If you insert the key into

the ignition switch during that time,

the light will start to fade out immedi-

ately.

After removing the key from the igni-

tion switch, the light will turn on for

about 15 seconds and then fade out.

(3) The light remains off even when the

door is opened.

CAUTION

After securing the rear seatback,

make sure that it is locked securely. If

it is not, you will see red in the

release lever.

LOCK UNLOCK

Red

CAUTION

When unhooking and hooking a sun

visor, be sure to handle it by the hard

plastic parts or the sun visor can be

damaged.

EXAMPLE (1)(2)(3)

EXAMPLE

Folding Rear Seats: 3

5-9

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

79J075

NOTE:

The number of doors involved in the light-

ing operation of the interior light depends

on the vehicle specification. If there is a

switch (rubber projection) at the door

opening as shown, the door is involved in

the lighting operation. The tailgate of SX4

is also involved in this operation even with-

out the rubber projection.

Spot Light

79J074

Push the switch to turn on the light and

push it again to turn off the light.

Assist Grips (if equipped)

54G249

Assist grips are provided for convenience.

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

To avoid damaging the assist grip

and the molded headlining, do not

hang down the assist grip.

Folding Rear Seats: 3

Armrest: 3

5-10

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Eyeglasses Holder

(if equipped)

86G067

To use the eyeglasses holder, open the

cover. Do not put heavy or sharp items in

the box.

Engine Hood

79J077

To open the engine hood:

1) Pull the hood release handle located on

the outboard side of the driver’s side of

the instrument panel. This will disen-

gage the engine hood lock half-way.

80J045

2) Push the under-hood release lever

sideways with your finger, as shown in

the illustration. While pushing the lever,

lift up the engine hood.

80JS024

3) Continue to lift up the hood until it is

high enough to support with the prop

rod.

CAUTION

If you park your vehicle outdoors in

direct sunlight or in hot weather, the

eyeglasses holder can get very hot

since it is close to the roof. So, when

parking in such conditions:

• Do not leave eyeglasses in the

holder. The heat may distort plastic

lenses or frames.

• Do not place flammable items, such

as a lighter, in the holder. The heat

may cause a fire.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Make sure the hood is fully closed

and latched before driving. If it is not,

it can fly up unexpectedly during

driving, obstructing your view and

resulting in an accident.

Sun Visor: 5

Interior Light Switch: 7

5-11

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Cup Holder and Storage Area

(if equipped)

80J046

79J052

Cup holders are provided in the center

console.

Accessory Socket

(if equipped)

80JC044

This socket can be used to provide 12 volt/

120 watt power for electrical accessories.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Do not use the cup holder or the stor-

age bin to hold cups containing hot

liquids or sharp-edged, hard or

breakable objects. Objects in these

bins may be thrown about during a

sudden stop or impact, and could

cause personal injury.

CAUTION

Use of inappropriate electrical acces-

sories can cause damage to your

vehicle’s electrical system. Make

sure that any electrical accessories

you use are designed to plug into this

type of socket.

Spot Light: 7

Assist Grips: 3

Coat Hooks:

5-12

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Frame Hooks

SX4

Front (1)

80JC048

SX4 SEDAN

Front (1)

80JC049

SX4

Rear (2)

80JC061

SX4 SEDAN

Rear (2)

56KN033

Side (3)

80JC062

79J132

(1)

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

(2) EXAMPLE

(3) EXAMPLE

(3)

EXAMPLE

Eyeglasses Holder:

Engine Hood: 5

5-13

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Frame hooks are provided on the front (1),

rear (2) and side (3) of the vehicle. The

hooks (1) and (2) are used for emergency

situations. The hooks (3) are used for

trailer/train shipping purposes.

To tow your vehicle on the road or highway,

follow the instruction of “Towing” in “EMER-

GENCY SERVICE” or “VEHICLE LOAD-

ING AND TOWING” section.

Tire Changing Tool

SX4

80JC014

SX4 SEDAN

80JC045

The jack, wheel brace, jack handle are

stowed in the luggage compartment.

80J048

To remove the spare tire, turn its bolt (1)

counterclockwise and remove it.

79J085

To remove the jack, turn its shaft counter-

clockwise and pull the jack out of the stor-

age bracket.

WARNING

Do not use the frame hooks to tow

another vehicle or to have your vehi-

cle towed on the road or highway.

The hooks (1) and (2) are designed

for use in emergency situations only,

such as if your vehicle or another

vehicle gets stuck in deep mud or

snow.

The hooks (3) are provided for trailer/

train shipping purposes.

CAUTION

Never use the hooks (1) and (2) for

trailer/train shipping purposes to pre-

vent damage to the vehicle.

EXAMPLE

(1)

EXAMPLE

Cup Holder and Storage Area: 3

5-14

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

SX4

79J086

SX4 SEDAN

80JC015

To stow the jack, place it in the storage

bracket and turn the shaft clockwise until

the jack is securely held in place.

Luggage Compartment Cover

(if equipped)

80J049

80J050

WARNING

The jack should be used only to

change wheels. It is important to read

the jacking instructions in the

“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section of

this manual before attempting to use

the jack.

WARNING

After using the jack, jack handle and

wheel wrench, be sure to stow them

securely or they can cause injury if

an accident occurs.

(1)

(2)

Front

Rear

Accessory Socket: 8

Frame Hooks: 5, 6

5-15

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Luggage or other cargo placed in the lug-

gage compartment can be hidden from

view by a luggage compartment cover.

Luggage Compartment Light

(SX4)

79J053

When you open the tailgate with the lug-

gage compartment light switch in the “ON”

position (1), the light comes on and

remains on as long as you keep the tail-

gate open.

When the luggage compartment light

switch is in the “OFF” position (2), the light

remains off regardless of whether the tail-

gate is opened or closed.

Trunk Light (SX4 SEDAN)

56KN038

When you open the trunk lid, the trunk light

comes on and remains on as long as you

keep the lid open.

WARNING

Do not carry items on top of the lug-

gage compartment cover, even if they

are small and light. Objects on top of

the cover could be thrown about in an

accident, causing injury, or could

obstruct the driver’s rear view.

CAUTION

Do not leave the tailgate open with

the luggage compartment light

switch in the “ON” position for a long

time, or the battery will discharge.

(1) (2)

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

Do not leave the trunk lid open for a

long time, or the battery will dis-

charge.

Frame Hooks: 5, 6

5-16

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

Radio Antenna

SX4

63J055

The radio antenna at the end of the roof is

removable. If the antenna hits anything

such as when parking in a garage with a

low ceiling, remove the antenna. Turn the

antenna counterclockwise. To reinstall the

antenna, turn it clockwise firmly by hand.

SX4 SEDAN

The radio antenna wire is printed inside

the rear window.

Roof Rails or Roof Rack

Anchors (if equipped)

Roof rails

79J167

Roof rack anchors

80J082

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the radio

antenna:

• Remove the antenna before using

an automatic car wash.

• Remove the antenna when it is pos-

sible for the antenna to hit some-

thing such as a low ceiling in a

parking garage or putting a car

cover over your car.

• Remove the antenna before put-

ting a car cover over your vehicle.

CAUTION

• Do not attach any metal objects to

the rear window glass, or place

metallic film near it. Either of these

conditions may cause poor recep-

tion or noise.

• When cleaning the inside of the

rear window, be careful not to

scratch or damage the rear window

antenna. Wipe the rear window

lightly along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

5-17

OTHER CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

80J21-03E

You can use the roof rails or the roof rack

anchors to attach the optional roof rack

which is available at your SUZUKI dealer. If

you use a roof rack, observe the instruc-

tions and precautions in this section and

provided with the roof rack.

• Make sure the roof rack is securely

installed.

• To mount various types of cargo (such

as skis, bicycles, etc.) properly, use suit-

able attachments which are available

from your SUZUKI dealer. Be sure to

install the attachments properly and

securely according to the instructions

provided. Do not mount cargo directly on

the roof panel. The cargo can damage

the roof panel.

• The gross weight of the roof rack plus

cargo must not exceed the loading

capacity (50 kg (110 lbs)). Also, do not

let the gross vehicle weight (fully loaded

vehicle including driver, passengers,

cargo, roof load and trailer tongue

weight) exceed the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR) listed in the

“SPECIFICATIONS” section of this man-

ual.

• Mount and secure the cargo onto the

roof rack properly according to the

instructions provided. Be sure to stow

the heaviest items at the bottom and dis-

tribute the cargo as evenly as possible.

• Do not carry items so large that they

hang over the bumpers or the sides of

the vehicle, or block your view.

• Secure the front and rear ends of long

items – such as wood panels, surfboards

and so forth – to both the front and rear

of the vehicle. You should protect the

painted surfaces of the vehicle from

scuffing caused by tie-down ropes.

• Check periodically to make sure the roof

rack is securely installed and free from

damage.

• For vehicles with roof rack anchors,

make sure the anchors are covered with

the caps when not in use.

WARNING

• Abrupt maneuvers or failure to

properly secure cargo can allow the

cargo to fly off the vehicle and hit

others, causing personal injury or

property damage.

• Mount cargo securely and avoid

abrupt maneuvers such as “jack-

rabbit” starts, sharp turns, fast cor-

nering and sudden braking. Check

periodically to make sure that

cargo is securely fastened.

• Large, bulky, long, or flat items can

affect vehicle aerodynamics or be

caught by the wind, and can reduce

vehicle control resulting in an acci-

dent and personal injury. Drive cau-

tiously at a safely reduced speed

when carrying this type of cargo.

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

60G408

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

Exhaust Gas Warning ......................................................... 6-1

Daily Inspection Checklist .................................................. 6-1

Starting the Engine ............................................................. 6-2

Engine Block Heater (if equipped) ..................................... 6-4

Using the Transaxle ............................................................ 6-5

Using the 2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive)

Switch (if equipped) ............................................................ 6-7

Braking ................................................................................. 6-9

Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) (if equipped) .......... 6-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........................ 6-14

Break-In ................................................................................ 6-18

Catalytic Converter ............................................................. 6-19

Improving Fuel Economy ................................................... 6-20

6-1

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Exhaust Gas Warning

52D334

Daily Inspection Checklist

Before Driving

1) Make sure that windows, mirrors, lights

and reflectors are clean and unob-

structed.

2) Visually check the tires for the following

points:

– the depth of the tread groove

– abnormal wear, cracks and damage

– loose wheel nuts

– existence of foreign material such as

nails, stones, etc.

Refer to “Tires” in “INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE” section for details.

3) Look for fluid, oil leaks.

NOTE:

It is normal for water to drip from the air

conditioning system after use.

4) Make sure the hood is fully closed and

latched.

5) Check the headlights, turn signal lights,

brake lights and horn for proper opera-

tion.

6) Lock all doors.

7) Adjust the seat and adjustable head

restraints (if equipped).

8) Check the brake pedal.

9) Adjust the mirrors.

10)Make sure that you and all passengers

have properly fastened your seat belts.

11)Make sure that all warning lights come

on as the key is turned to the “ON” or

“START” position.

WARNING

Avoid breathing exhaust gases.

Exhaust gases contain carbon mon-

oxide, a potentially lethal gas that is

colorless and odorless. Since carbon

monoxide is difficult to detect by

itself, be sure to take the following

precautions to help prevent carbon

monoxide from entering your vehicle.

• Do not leave the engine running in

garages or other confined areas.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not park with the engine run-

ning for a long period of time, even

in an open area. If it is necessary to

sit for a short time in a parked vehi-

cle with the engine running, make

sure the air intake selector is set to

“FRESH AIR” and the blower is at

high speed.

• Avoid operating the vehicle with

the tail gate or trunk open. If it is

necessary to operate the vehicle

with the tail gate or trunk open,

make sure the sunroof (if equipped)

and all windows are closed, and the

blower is at high speed with the air

intake selector set to “FRESH AIR”.

• To allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the air inlet grille in front of the

windshield clear of snow, leaves or

other obstructions at all times.

• Keep the exhaust tailpipe area clear

of snow and other material to help

reduce the buildup of exhaust

gases under the vehicle. This is

particularly important when parked

in blizzard conditions.

• Have the exhaust system inspected

periodically for damage and leaks.

Any damage or leaks should be

repaired immediately.

Exhaust Gas Warning: NO

Daily Inspection Checklist: NO

6-2

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

12)Check all gauges.

13)Make sure that the BRAKE light turns

off when the parking brake is released.

Once a week, or each time you fill your fuel

tank, perform the following under-hood

checks:

1) Engine oil level

2) Coolant level

3) Brake fluid level

4) Power steering (if equipped) fluid level

5) Windshield washer fluid level

6) Hood latch operation

Pull the hood release handle inside the

vehicle. Make sure that you cannot

open the hood all the way without

releasing the secondary latch. Be sure

to close the hood securely after check-

ing for proper latch operation. See the

item “All latches, hinges and locks” of

“CHASSIS AND BODY” in the “Periodic

Maintenance Schedule” section in the

“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”

section for lubrication schedule.

Starting the Engine

Before Starting the Engine

1) Make sure the parking brake is set fully.

2) Manual Transaxle – Shift into “N” (Neu-

tral) and depress the clutch pedal all

the way to the floor.

Hold the clutch pedal while starting the

engine.

Automatic Transaxle – If the gearshift

lever is not in “P” (Park) position, shift

into “P”. (If you need to re-start the

engine while the vehicle is moving, shift

into “N”.)

NOTE:

The engine of manual transaxle vehicle will

not start unless the clutch pedal is

depressed.

NOTE:

Automatic transaxle vehicles have a starter

interlock device which is designed to keep

the starter from operating if the transaxle is

in any of the drive positions.

Starting a Cold Engine

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,

crank the engine by turning the ignition key

to “START”. Release the key when the

engine starts.

If the engine does not start after 15 sec-

onds of cranking, wait about 15 seconds,

then press down the accelerator pedal to

1/3 of its travel and try cranking the engine

again. Release the key and accelerator

pedal when the engine starts.

If the engine still does not start, try holding

the accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor while cranking. This should clear the

engine if it is flooded.

If you are unable to start the engine using

this procedure, consult your SUZUKI

dealer.

Starting a Warm Engine

Use the same procedure as for “Starting a

Cold Engine”.

WARNING

Make sure the hood is fully closed

and latched before driving. If it is not,

it can fly up unexpectedly during

driving, obstructing your view and

resulting in an accident.

WARNING

Make sure that the parking brake is

set fully and the transaxle is in Neu-

tral (or Park for vehicles with an auto-

matic transaxle) before attempting to

start the engine.

CAUTION

• Stop turning the starter immedi-

ately after the engine has started or

the starter system can be dam-

aged.

• Do not crank the engine for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the

engine doesn’t start on the first try,

wait about 15 seconds before try-

ing again.

Daily Inspection Checklist: NO

Starting the Engine: 1

6-3

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Vehicle With Keyless Start System

80JC002

The ignition switch can be operated with-

out using an ignition key when the remote

controller is in an area of the vehicle other

than the rear luggage area. To turn the

ignition switch, first push in the switch.

NOTE:

You must push in the ignition switch to turn

it from the “LOCK” position to the “ACC”

position. To return to the “LOCK” position

from the “ACC” position, turn the ignition

switch counterclockwise while pushing in

the switch.

80J037

If the keyless start system blue indicator

light illuminates on the instrument cluster,

you can turn the ignition switch. If the red

indicator light illuminates, you can not turn

the ignition switch.

NOTE:

• The ignition switch can be turned to the

“ACC” position when the keyless start

system blue indicator light illuminates.

The blue indicator light will illuminate for

several seconds when you push in the

ignition switch and then will turn off to

protect the system. In this case, you

must release the ignition switch and

push it again to illuminate the blue indi-

cator light.

• If the keyless start system red indicator

light illuminates, the remote controller

may not be in the vehicle or the battery

of the remote controller may be unreli-

able.

NOTE:

• If the battery of the remote controller

runs down or there are strong radio

waves or noise, the operating range may

be narrower or the remote controller may

be inoperative.

• If the remote controller is too close to the

door glass, it may not operate.

• The ignition switch may not turn when

the remote controller is on the instru-

ment panel, in the glove box, in the door

pocket, in the sun visor or on the floor.

You can also turn the ignition switch by

inserting the ignition key into the slot.

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

The remote controller is a sensitive

electronic instrument. To avoid dam-

aging it, do not expose it to impacts,

moisture or high temperature (such

as on the dashboard under direct

sunlight).

Engine Block Heater: 1

6-4

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Engine Block Heater

(if equipped)

54G209

The engine block heater will help you start

the engine more easily in very cold

weather (–18°C (0°F) or below). To use the

engine block heater:

1) Turn off the engine.

2) Open the engine hood.

3) Untie the block heater cord and remove

the block heater plug cap. When the

engine block heater is not in use,

ensure the heater cord is secured to

prevent contact with any moving parts.

4) Using a heavy-duty, three-prong

grounded extension cord, plug the

female end into the block heater socket

and the male end into a normal,

grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

NOTE:

Activate the heater at least four hours

before you start the engine. However, as

the heating time varies depending on the

ambient temperature and other factors,

adjust the time by observing the engine

cranking condition.

After using the block heater:

1) Unplug the extension cord and reinstall

the plug cap.

2) Tie the block heater cord back to its

original position.

3) Close the engine hood securely before

starting the engine.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

To avoid serious personal injury

caused by electrical shock or fire:

• Do not plug the cord into a non-

grounded outlet. Only use a prop-

erly grounded three-prong 110-volt

AC outlet.

• Do not use a 2-wire (non-grounded)

extension cord.

• Only use a heavy-duty, three-prong

extension cord rated for at least 15

amps.

CAUTION

Secure the block heater cord back to

its original position or to the routed

position. A loose cord could get

caught in the engine accessory drive

belt(s) or other moving parts.

Using the Transaxle: 10

6-5

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Using the Transaxle

4-Speed Automatic Transaxle

77J021

Gearshift lever

77J028

Use the gearshift lever positions as

described below:

P (Park)

Use this position to lock the transaxle

when the vehicle is parked or when start-

ing the engine. Shift into Park only when

the vehicle is completely stationary.

R (Reverse)

Use this position to reverse the vehicle

from stop. Make sure that vehicle is com-

pletely stationary before shifting into

Reverse.

N (Neutral)

Use this position for starting the engine if

the engine stalls and you need to restart it

while the vehicle is moving. You may also

shift into Neutral and depress the brake

pedal to hold the vehicle stationary during

idling.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal driving.

With the gearshift lever in “D” range you

can get an automatic downshift by press-

ing the accelerator pedal. The higher the

vehicle speed is, the more you need to

press the accelerator pedal to get a down-

shift.

3 (Low 3)

Use this position for driving on moderate

uphill and downhill gradients. The engine

braking effect on moderate downhills can

be used in this position. The transaxle

shifts up only to 3rd gear.

2 (Low 2)

Use this position to provide extra power

when climbing hills, or to provide engine

braking when going down hills.

WARNING

Always depress the brake pedal

before shifting from “P” (Park) (or

“N” (Neutral) if the vehicle is station-

ary) to a forward or reverse gear, to

help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly when you shift.

Using the Transaxle: 10

6-6

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

L (Low 1)

Use this position to provide maximum

power when climbing steep hills or driving

through deep snow or mud, or to provide

maximum engine braking when going

down steep hills.

NOTE:

If you move the gearshift lever to a lower

gear while driving faster than the maximum

allowable speed for the lower gear, the

transaxle will not actually downshift until

your speed drops below the maximum

speed for the lower gear.

Manual Transaxle

79J002

Starting off

To start off, depress the clutch pedal all the

way to the floor and shift into 1st gear.

After releasing the parking brake, gradually

release the clutch. When you hear a

change in the engine’s sound, slowly press

the accelerator while continuing to gradu-

ally release the clutch.

Shifting

All forward gears are synchronized, which

provides for quiet, and easy shifting.

Always depress the clutch pedal all the

way to the floor before shifting gears. Keep

the engine speed does not rise into the red

zone of the tachometer.

CAUTION

Be sure to take the following precau-

tions to help avoid damage to the

automatic transaxle:

• Make sure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stationary before shifting

into “P” or “R”.

• Do not shift from “P” or “N” to “R”,

“D”, “3”, “2”, or “L” when the

engine is running above idle speed.

• Do not rev the engine with the tran-

saxle in a drive position (“R”, “D”,

“3”, “2”, or “L”) and the front

wheels not moving.

• Do not use the accelerator to hold

the vehicle on a hill. Use the vehi-

cle’s brakes.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

• Reduce your speed and downshift

to a lower gear before going down

a long or steep hill. Downshifting

will allow the engine to provide

braking. Avoid riding the brakes or

they may overheat, resulting in

brake failure.

• When driving on slippery roads, be

sure to slow down before down-

shifting. Large and sudden

changes in engine speed may

cause loss of traction, which could

cause you to lose control.

• Make sure that the vehicle is com-

pletely stopped before you shift

into reverse.

CAUTION

• To help avoid clutch damage, do

not use the clutch pedal as a foot-

rest while driving or use the clutch

to keep the vehicle stationary on a

slope. Depress the clutch fully

when shifting.

• When shifting or starting off, do not

race the engine. Racing the engine

can shorten engine life and affect

smooth shifting.

Using the Transaxle: 10

6-7

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Using the 2WD/i-AWD

(intelligent All Wheel Drive)

Switch (if equipped)

80J009

This i-AWD system enables you to select

the driving mode according to the driving

conditions by operating the 2WD/i-AWD

switch. With this feature, you can select 3

mode positions, “2WD”, “i-AWD AUTO”

and “i-AWD LOCK” by operating the 2WD/

i-AWD switch even when the vehicle is

moving, provided the front wheels are in

the straight ahead position.

Description of 3 Mode 4 x 4 System

Positions

2WD

In this position, engine power is supplied to

the front axle only. Use this position for

normal driving (on dry, hard surfaces).

i-AWD AUTO

In this position, engine power is supplied to

the front and rear axles at normal speed,

providing greater traction than 2-wheel

drive. Use this position for driving on paved

roads or on slippery roads (icy, snow-cov-

ered, muddy, etc.).

In the AUTO mode, the i-AWD controller

judges the driving conditions using signals

from sensors.

When slipping of the front wheels is

detected, the electronically controlled cou-

pling supplies optimum driving force to the

rear wheels. This function improves driving

stability and running through performance

on rough roads and stabilizes driving per-

formance even on a snow covered up-hill

road or the like.

Also, during normal driving on paved

roads, torque distribution to the rear

wheels is reduced to achieve the nearly

front wheel drive condition, thereby fuel

consumption is improved.

i-AWD LOCK

In this position, engine power is supplied to

the front and rear axles at reduced speed.

Use this position when it is hard to start off

in the “i-AWD AUTO” mode such as in

mud, sand or on snow.

NOTE:

• Avoid operating your vehicle in the “i-

AWD LOCK” on wet pavement as much

as possible. Operating your vehicle in

the “i-AWD LOCK” on wet pavement

may cause severe damage to the drive

train.

• As the vehicle speed increases, the “i-

AWD LOCK” mode is automatically can-

celed and the “i-AWD AUTO” mode is

selected.

• When the ignition switch is turned to the

“OFF” position, the “i-AWD LOCK” mode

is canceled.

2WD/i-AWD Switch Operation

Operate the 2WD/i-AWD switch according

to the appropriate procedure described

below:

How to turn on 2WD/i-AWD switch

2WD/i-AWD switch will activate when the

ignition switch is turned on.

From 2WD to i-AWD AUTO

Turn the 2WD/i-AWD switch to the neutral

position, and the “i-AWD AUTO” indicator

will come on.

79J040

Braking: 6

6-8

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

From i-AWD AUTO to i-AWD LOCK

Push the “i-AWD LOCK” switch for a few

seconds until the “i-AWD LOCK” indicator

will come on.

79J100

From i-AWD LOCK to i-AWD AUTO

Push the “i-AWD LOCK” switch, and the “i-

AWD AUTO” indicator will come on.

From i-AWD AUTO or LOCK to 2WD

Push the “2WD” switch, and the “i-AWD

AUTO” or “i-AWD LOCK” indicator will turn

off.

NOTE:

• The 2WD/i-AWD switch can be operated

when the vehicle is either stopped or

moving.

• Make sure that the front wheels are in

the straight ahead position when operat-

ing the 2WD/i-AWD switch.

• While making turns or accelerating and

decelerating, operating the 2WD/i-AWD

switch or turning off the key switch in the

“i-AWD AUTO” or “i-AWD LOCK” mode

may cause a shock, but this is not a sys-

tem malfunction.

• While driving in the “i-AWD LOCK”

mode, as the vehicle speed increases,

the driving mode changes to the “i-AWD

AUTO” mode automatically. Even when

the vehicle speed reduces, on the other

hand, the driving mode does not return

to the “i-AWD LOCK” mode automati-

cally. You should press the “i-AWD

LOCK” switch according to the driving

conditions.

• Any forcible operation while driving off-

road in the sand or water or when a

wheel has run off the road, the difference

of the revolution between front wheels

and rear wheels increases (wheels run

idle). If this state continues, the oil tem-

perature of the driving system parts

rises.

In such case, the “i-AWD AUTO” indica-

tor light blinks and the driving mode

changes to the 2WD mode to protect the

driving system parts.

When you operate your vehicle in the i-

AWD mode continuously, park the vehi-

cle at a safe place and run the engine

idle. After some time, the “i-AWD AUTO”

indicator light turns on again and the

driving mode returns to the “i-AWD

AUTO” mode.

CAUTION

• Never use the “i-AWD LOCK” mode

when driving on dry paved roads.

Avoid using the “i-AWD LOCK”

mode when driving on wet paved

roads as much as possible. Use of

the “i-AWD LOCK” mode in above

conditions will apply excessive

force to the driving system and

may cause a critical failure. Also,

the tires may wear faster and fuel

consumption may be affected

adversely.

• Note that i-AWD vehicles are not

all-around vehicles. Be sure to

observe following instructions

when driving your vehicle.

– Do not drive through water like

crossing a river.

– Do not drive continuously where

front wheels tend to race in

places such as sand and mud.

– When any wheel is in the air for

such reason as running off the

road, do not race it needlessly.

• If the “i-AWD AUTO” and the “i-

AWD LOCK” indicator lights stay

on and come on simultaneously

when driving, there may be some-

thing wrong the i-AWD system.

Have the system inspected by an

authorized SUZUKI dealer.

Braking: 6

6-9

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Braking

60G165

The distance needed to bring any vehicle

to a halt increases with the speed of the

vehicle. The braking distance needed, for

example, at 60 km/h (37 mph) will be

approximately 4 times greater than the

braking distance needed at 30 km/h (19

mph). Start to brake the vehicle when there

is plenty of distance between your vehicle

and the stopping point, and slow down

gradually.

Power Assisted Brakes

Your vehicle has power assisted brakes. If

power assistance is lost due to a stalled

engine or other failures, the system is still

fully operational on reserve power and you

can bring the vehicle to a complete stop by

pressing the brake pedal once and holding

it down. The reserve power is partly used

up when you depress the brake pedal and

reduces each time the pedal is pressed.

Apply smooth and even pressure to the

pedal. Do not pump the pedal.

CAUTION

Unevenly worn tires can cause prob-

lems in the operation of the 2WD/i-

AWD switch. Be sure to rotate the

tires according to the maintenance

schedule. Refer to “Tires” and “Main-

tenance Schedule” in the “INSPEC-

TION AND MAINTENANCE” section

for proper tire rotation procedures.

WARNING

If water gets into the brake drums,

brake performance may become poor

and unpredictable.

After driving through water or wash-

ing the underside of the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving at a slow

speed to see if they have maintained

their normal effectiveness. If the

brakes are less effective than normal,

dry them by repeatedly applying the

brakes while driving slowly until the

brakes have regained their normal

effectiveness.

Braking: 6

Break-In: 6

Catalytic Converter: NO

6-10

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Brake Assist System

When you slam the brakes on, the brake

assist system judges as an emergency

stop and provides more powerful braking

for a driver who cannot hold down the

brake pedal firmly.

NOTE:

If you depress the brakes forcefully, you

may hear a clicking sound in the brake

pedal. This is normal and indicates that the

brake assist system is activated properly.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

(if equipped)

ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-

tronically controlling braking pressure. It

will also help you maintain steering control

when braking on slippery surfaces or when

braking hard.

The ABS works automatically, so you do

not need any special braking technique.

Just push the brake pedal down without

pumping. The ABS will operate whenever it

senses that the wheels are locking up.

You may feel the brake pedal pulsate while

the ABS is operating.

NOTE:

The ABS will not work if vehicle speed is

under 5 – 6 km/h (3 – 4 mph).

WARNING

Even without reserve power in the

brake system, you can still stop the

vehicle by pressing the brake pedal

harder than normally required. How-

ever, the stopping distance may be

longer.

WARNING

• On some types of loose surfaces

(such as gravel, snow-covered

roads, etc.), the stopping distance

required for an ABS-equipped vehi-

cle may be slightly greater than for

a comparable vehicle with a con-

ventional brake system. With a

conventional brake system, skid-

ding tires are able to “plow” the

gravel or snow layer, shortening

the stopping distance. ABS mini-

mizes this resistance effect. Allow

for extra stopping distance when

driving on loose surfaces.

• On regular paved roads, some driv-

ers may be able to obtain slightly

shorter stopping distances with

conventional brake systems than

with ABS.

• In both of the above conditions,

ABS will still offer the advantage of

helping you maintain directional

control. However, remember that

ABS will not compensate for bad

road or weather conditions or poor

driver judgment. Use good judg-

ment and do not drive faster than

conditions will safely allow.

Catalytic Converter: NO

Improving Fuel Economy: NO

6-11

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

54G140

65D451

How the ABS Works

A computer continuously monitors wheel

speed. The computer compares the

changes in wheel speed when braking. If

the wheels slow suddenly, indicating a

skidding situation, the computer will

change braking pressure several times

each second to prevent the wheels from

locking. When you start your vehicle or

when you accelerate after a hard stop, you

may hear a momentary motor or clicking

noise as the system resets or checks itself.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2)) on

the instrument panel comes on and

stays on while driving, there may be a

problem with the ABS system.

If this happens:

1) Pull off the road and stop care-

fully.

2) Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”

and then start the engine again.

If the warning light comes on briefly

then turns off, the system is normal.

If the warning light still stays on,

have the system inspected by your

SUZUKI dealer immediately. If the

ABS system becomes inoperative,

the brake system will function as an

ordinary brake system that has no

ABS.

WARNING

If the ABS warning light ((1) or (2))

and the Brake system warning light

(3) on the instrument panel simulta-

neously stay on or come on when

driving, both anti-lock function and

rear brake force control function

(Proportioning valve function) of the

ABS system may have failed. This

could cause the rear wheels to skid

or the vehicle to spin during braking

on a slippery road or hard braking on

a dry paved road. If both warning

lights come on, drive carefully, avoid-

ing hard braking as much as possi-

ble, and ask your SUZUKI dealer to

inspect the ABS system immediately.

(1) (2)

(3)

WARNING

The ABS may not work properly if

tires or wheels other than those

specified in the owner’s manual are

used. This is because the ABS works

by comparing changes in wheel

speed. When replacing tires or

wheels, use only the size and type

specified in this owner’s manual.

Improving Fuel Economy: NO

6-12

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Electronic Stability Program

(ESP®) (if equipped)

ESP® is a registered trademark of

DaimlerChrysler AG.

The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)

helps to control the vehicle during corner-

ing if the vehicle is understeering or over-

steering. It also assists you in maintaining

traction while accelerating on loose or slip-

pery road surfaces. It does this by regulat-

ing the engine’s output, and by selectively

applying the brakes. In addition, ESP®

helps to avoid skidding by controlling brak-

ing pressure.

The ESP® has the following three systems:

Stability Control System

The vehicle stability control system helps

provide integrated control of systems such

as anti-lock brakes, traction control, engine

control, etc. This system automatically

controls the brakes and engine to help pre-

vent the vehicle from skidding when cor-

nering on a slippery road surface or when

turning the steering wheel abruptly.

Traction Control System

The traction control system automatically

helps prevent the spinning of wheels when

the vehicle is started or accelerated on

slippery road surfaces. The system oper-

ates only if it senses that some of the

wheels are spinning or beginning to lose

traction. When this happens, the system

operates the front or rear brakes and

reduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

NOTE:

You may hear a clicking sound in the

engine compartment for a few seconds

when you start the engine or just after the

vehicle begins to move. This means that

the above systems are in the self-check

mode. This sound does not indicate a mal-

function.

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS)

ABS will help you avoid skidding by elec-

tronically controlling braking pressure. It

will also help you maintain steering control

when braking on slippery surfaces or when

braking hard. The ABS works automati-

cally, so you do not have to use any special

braking technique. Just push the brake

pedal down without pumping. The ABS will

operate whenever it senses that wheels

are locking up. You may feel the brake

pedal pulsate while the ABS is operating.

(For more information on ABS, see “Brak-

ing” in the “OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE”

section.)

NOTE:

If the ABS system is activated, you may

hear a clunking noise and/or feel pulsating

in the brake pedal. This is normal and indi-

cates that the brake fluid pressure is being

controlled properly.

WARNING

The ESP® cannot enhance the vehi-

cle’s driving stability in all situations

and does not control your vehicle’s

entire braking system. The ESP® can-

not prevent accidents, including

those resulting from excessive speed

in turns, or hydroplaning. Only a safe

and attentive driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESP®-

equipped vehicle must never be used

as a substitute for careful driving.

6-13

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

The ESP® indicator lights are described

below:

SLIP Indicator Light

66J033

When one of the ESP® systems other than

ABS is activated, the SLIP indicator light in

the instrument cluster blinks 5 times per

second.

NOTE:

When the SLIP indicator light comes on

and stays on while driving, indicating a

malfunction of the ESP® systems (other

than ABS), the brake system will function

as an ordinary ABS with no additional

ESP® functions.

NOTE:

When you disconnect and re-connect the

battery, ESP® system functions other than

ABS will be deactivated and the slip indica-

tor light will blink 1 time per second. In this

case, use the following procedure to re-

activate the ESP® systems:

1) Drive your vehicle straight ahead with-

out tire slippage at a speed until the slip

indicator is turned off. (Drive straight for

approximately 35 km/h (22 mph) or

more and 10 seconds or more.)

2) The slip indicator light will go out and

the ESP® systems (other than ABS) will

be re-activated.

It may take more than few seconds before

the slip indicator light goes out depending

on the road surface condition.

“ESP” Warning Light

66J031

When the ESP® systems (other than ABS)

have a system malfunction, the “ESP”

warning light in the instrument cluster

comes on.

WARNING

• The ESP® may not work properly if

tires or wheels other than those

specified in the Owner’s Manual are

used. When replacing tires or

wheels, use only the size and type

specified in this Owner’s Manual.

• The ESP® may not work properly if

tires are not inflated to the recom-

mended tire inflation pressure.

• The ESP® may not work properly if

tires are fitted with tire chains.

• The ESP® may not work properly if

the tires are excessively worn. Be

sure to replace tires when the tread

wear indicators in the grooves

appear on the tread surface.

• The ESP® is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

WARNING

• The ESP® may not work properly if

engine related parts such as the

muffler are not equivalent to stan-

dard equipment or are extremely

deteriorated.

• Do not modify the vehicle’s sus-

pension since the ESP® may not

operate correctly.

CAUTION

If the SLIP indicator light comes on

and stays on while driving, there may

be a malfunction of the ESP® sys-

tems (other than ABS). You should

have the systems inspected by an

authorized SUZUKI dealer.

6-14

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

NOTE:

When the “ESP” warning light comes on,

or stays on while driving, indicating a mal-

function of the ESP® systems (other than

ABS), the brake system will function as an

ordinary ABS that has no additional ESP®

functions.

“ESP OFF” Indicator Light

66J032

You should turn the ESP® on during your

ordinary driving, so that you have the ben-

efits of all of the ESP® systems.

It may be required to turn the ESP® sys-

tems (other than ABS) off if your vehicle is

stuck in sand, mud, or snow, where wheel

spin is necessary.

“ESP OFF” switch

62J142

When the “ESP OFF” switch located at the

center console is pushed and held to turn

off the ESP® systems (other than ABS),

the “ESP OFF” indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster comes on.

When you have turned the ESP® systems

(other than ABS) off, make sure to turn

them back on before resuming ordinary

driving.

When you push the “ESP OFF” switch

again, the “ESP OFF” indicator light will go

out and all of the ESP® systems will be

activated.

ABS Warning Light / Brake System

Warning Light

See “Braking” in the “OPERATING YOUR

VEHICLE” section.

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)

The tire pressure monitoring system is

designed to alert you when one or more of

the tires on your vehicle is significantly

under-inflated. A Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS) sensor containing a

unique identification code is mounted on

each wheel. The TPMS sensors transmit

tire pressure signals to a central receiver

which relays the information to a tire pres-

sure monitoring system controller. When

the inflation pressure of one or more tires

indicates significant under-inflation, the low

tire pressure warning light shown below

comes on.

CAUTION

If the “ESP” warning light comes on,

or stays on while driving, there may

be a malfunction of the ESP® sys-

tems (other than ABS). You should

have the systems inspected by an

authorized SUZUKI dealer.

6-15

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

52D305

WARNING

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to over-

heat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

WARNING

The tire pressure monitoring system

is not a substitute for regular tire

pressure inspections. Check tire

inflation pressures monthly when

cold and set to the recommended

inflation pressure as specified on the

vehicle’s tire information placard and

in the owner’s manual. Refer to

“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

does not come on when the ignition

is turned to the “ON” position, or

comes on and blinks while driving

there may be a problem with the tire

pressure monitoring system. Have

your vehicle inspected by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer. Even if the light

turns off after blinking, indicating

that the monitoring system has

recovered, make sure to have an

authorized SUZUKI dealer check the

system.

WARNING

The load rating of your tires is

reduced at lower inflation pressures.

If your tires become even moderately

under-inflated, the vehicle load may

exceed the load rating of the tires,

which can lead to tire failure. The low

tire pressure warning light will not

alert you of this condition. The warn-

ing light will only come on when one

or more of your tires become signifi-

cantly under-inflated. Check and

adjust your tire inflation pressure at

least once a month. Refer to “Tires”

in the “INSPECTION AND MAINTE-

NANCE” section.

6-16

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

The low tire pressure warning light can

come on due to normal causes such as

natural air leaks and pressure changes

caused by changes in temperature or

atmospheric pressure. Adjusting the air

pressure in the tires to the pressure shown

on the tire information placard should

cause the low tire pressure warning light to

turn off.

If the light turns on again shortly after

adjusting the pressure in your tires, you

may have a flat tire. If you have a flat tire,

replace it with the spare tire. Refer to

“Jacking Instructions” in the “EMER-

GENCY SERVICE” section. Refer to

“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels” for

instructions on how to restore normal oper-

ation of the tire pressure monitoring sys-

tem after you have had a flat tire.

NOTE:

• When the tire inflation pressure is

adjusted in high altitude areas, the low

tire pressure light may not turn off even

after tire inflation pressure adjustment.

In this case, adjust the inflation pressure

to a slightly higher pressure than is

shown on the tire information placard.

• The low tire pressure warning light may

turn off temporarily after coming on. This

could be due to surface temperature

increases after long distance driving or

traveling to a high temperature area.

Even if the tire pressure warning light

turns off after coming on, make sure to

check the inflation pressure of all tires.

• To reduce the chance that the low tire

pressure warning light will come on due

to normal changes in temperature and

atmospheric pressure, it is important to

check and adjust the tire pressures

when the tires are cold. Tires that

appear to be at the specified pressure

when checked after driving, when the

tires are warm, could have pressure

below the specification when the tires

cool down. Also, tires that are inflated to

the specified pressure in a warm garage

may have pressure below the specifica-

tion when the vehicle is driven outside in

very cold temperature. If you adjust the

tire pressure in a garage that is warmer

than the outside temperature, you

should add 1 psi to the recommended

cold tire inflation pressure for every 10°F

difference between garage temperature

and outside temperature.

For tire inflation pressure information, refer

to “Tire Inflation Pressure” in the “INSPEC-

TION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

WARNING

If the low tire pressure warning light

comes on and stays on, reduce your

speed and avoid abrupt steering and

braking. Stop in a safe place as soon

as possible and check your tires.

• If you have a flat tire, replace it with

the spare tire. Refer to “Jacking

Instructions” in the “EMERGENCY

SERVICE” section. Refer to

“Replacing Tires and/or Wheels”

for instructions on how to restore

normal operation of the tire pres-

sure monitoring system after you

have had a flat tire.

• If one or more of your tires is

under-inflated adjust the inflation

pressure in all of your tires to the

recommended inflation pressure as

soon as possible.

Be aware that driving on a signifi-

cantly under-inflated tire can cause

the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure, and may affect steering

control and brake effectiveness. This

could lead to an accident, resulting in

severe injury or death.

6-17

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

TPMS Malfunction Indicator When you turn off the engine, however, the

malfunction indicator resets. It takes about

ten minutes after restarting the engine for

the malfunction to be detected again and

for the light to start flashing.

TPMS Limitations

The tire pressure monitoring system may

not function properly under certain circum-

stances. In the following situations, the low

tire pressure warning light may come on

and remain on or may blink.

• When you replace a flat tire with the

spare tire.

• When you include the spare tire during a

tire rotation.

• When the TPMS sensor is damaged dur-

ing a tire replacement or liquid sealants

are used to repair a flat tire.

WARNING

Your vehicle also has been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly.

WARNING

The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated.

This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long

as the malfunction exists.

WARNING

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pres-

sure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons,

including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on

the vehicle that prevent the TPMS

from functioning properly. Always

check the TPMS malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS to continue to

function properly.

CAUTION

• The tire pressure sensors can be

damaged by the installation or

removal of tires. When tires must

be repaired or replaced, we highly

recommend that you have them

repaired or replaced by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer.

• Do not use liquid sealants for a flat

tire as air pressure sensors can be

damaged.

• If the low tire pressure warning

light comes on frequently, there

may be something wrong with one

of the tires or with the monitoring

system. Have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized SUZUKI

dealer.

6-18

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

• When the TPMS sensor’s electronic sig-

nal is disturbed in one of the following

ways:

– Electric devices or facilities using simi-

lar radio wave frequencies are nearby.

– A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle,

in particular, around the wheels or

wheel housings.

– Snow tires or tire chains are used.

• When you use non-genuine SUZUKI

wheels or tires.

Replacing Tires and/or Wheels

If you get a flat tire, Suzuki recommends

that you have an authorized SUZUKI

dealer mount a new tire on the wheel that

had the flat tire, and reinstall this tire on the

vehicle in place of the spare. The TPMS is

already set up to recognize the ID code of

the original wheel, and normal TPMS oper-

ation will be restored.

If you need to replace original wheels on

your vehicle, your dealer must make sure

that TPMS sensors are installed in the new

wheels and must set up the TPMS to rec-

ognize the new sensors.

NOTE:

A TPMS sensor is not installed in the spare

tire. You should use the spare tire only in

an emergency situation, and should

replace the spare tire as soon as possible

to restore normal TPMS operation.

For Vehicles Sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1) This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2) This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for com-

pliance could void the user’s authority to

operate the equipment.

Traveling to CANADA

Please note that service for the tire pres-

sure monitoring system may not be avail-

able in CANADA should there be any

problems or malfunctions in the system.

Break-In

WARNING

Only use tires and wheels recom-

mended by SUZUKI as standard or

optional equipment for your vehicle.

Use of tires or wheels not recom-

mended by SUZUKI can result in

TPMS failure. Refer to “Tires” in the

“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE”

section for additional information.

CAUTION

The future performance and reliabil-

ity of the engine depends on the care

and restraint exercised during its

early life. It is especially important to

observe the following precautions

during the initial 960 km (600 miles)

of vehicle operation.

• After starting, do not race the

engine. Warm it up gradually.

• Avoid prolonged vehicle operation

at a constant speed. Moving parts

will break in better if you vary your

speed.

• Start off from a stop slowly. Avoid

full throttle starts.

• Avoid hard stopping, especially

during the first 320 km (200 miles)

of driving.

• Do not drive slowly with the tran-

saxle in a high gear.

• Drive the vehicle at moderate

engine speeds.

6-19

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Catalytic Converter

54G236

The purpose of the catalytic converter is to

minimize the amount of harmful pollutants

in your vehicle’s exhaust. Use of leaded

fuel in vehicles equipped with catalytic

converters is prohibited by federal law,

because lead deactivates the pollutant-

reducing components of the catalyst sys-

tem.

The converter is designed to last the life of

the vehicle under normal usage and when

unleaded fuel is used. No special mainte-

nance is required on the converter. How-

ever, it is very important to keep the engine

properly tuned. Engine misfiring, which

can result from an improperly tuned

engine, may cause overheating of the cat-

alyst. This may result in permanent heat

damage to the catalyst and other vehicle

components.

54G584S

CAUTION

To minimize the possibility of catalyst

or other vehicle damage:

• Maintain the engine in the proper

operating condition.

• In the event of an engine malfunc-

tion, particularly one involving

engine misfire or other apparent

loss of performance, have the vehi-

cle serviced promptly.

• Do not shut off the engine or inter-

rupt the ignition when the transaxle

is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by

pushing or towing the vehicle or

coasting down a hill.

• Do not idle the engine with any

spark plug wires disconnected or

removed, such as during diagnos-

tic testing.

• Do not idle the vehicle for pro-

longed periods if idling seems

rough or there are other malfunc-

tions.

• Do not allow the fuel tank to get

near the empty level.

WARNING

Be careful where you park and drive;

the catalytic converter and other

exhaust components can get very

hot. As with any vehicle, do not park

or operate this vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as dry

grass or leaves can come in contact

with a hot exhaust system.

6-20

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

Improving Fuel Economy

The following instructions will help you

improve fuel economy.

Avoid excessive idling

If you are to wait for more than a minute

while you are parked, stop the engine and

start it again later. When warming up a

cold engine, allow the engine to idle until

the temperature gauge pointer comes up

to the “C” position. In this position, the

engine is sufficiently warm for starting off.

Avoid “jackrabbit” starts

Fast starts away from lights or stop signs

will consume fuel unnecessarily and

shorten engine life. Start off slowly.

Avoid unnecessary stops

Avoid unnecessary deceleration and stop-

ping. Try to maintain a slow, steady speed

whenever possible. Slowing down and then

accelerating again uses more fuel.

Keep a steady cruising speed

Keep as constant a speed as road and traf-

fic conditions will permit.

60A183S

Keep the air cleaner clean

A dirty air cleaner will cause the fuel injec-

tion system to supply too much fuel to the

engine for the amount of air being sup-

plied. The result is waste of fuel due to

incomplete fuel burning.

Keep weight to a minimum

The heavier the load, the more fuel the

vehicle consumes. Take out any luggage

or cargo when it is not necessary.

Keep tire pressure correct

Underinflation of the tires can waste fuel

due to increased running resistance of the

tires. Keep your tires inflated to the correct

pressure shown on the label located below

the driver’s side door latch striker.

EXAMPLE

6-21

OPERATING YOUR VEHICLE

80J21-03E

MEMO

DRIVING TIPS

80J21-03E

60G409

DRIVING TIPS

Highway Driving .................................................................. 7-1

Driving on Hills .................................................................... 7-1

Driving on Slippery Roads ................................................. 7-2

7-1

DRIVING TIPS

80J21-03E

52D078S

Highway Driving

When driving at highway speeds, pay

attention to the following:

• Stopping distance progressively

increases with vehicle speed. Apply the

brakes far enough ahead of the stopping

point to allow for the extra stopping dis-

tance.

• On rainy days, “Hydroplaning” can occur.

“Hydroplaning” is the loss of direct con-

tact between the road surface and the

vehicle’s tires due to a water film forming

between them. Steering or braking the

vehicle while “Hydroplaning” can be very

difficult, and loss of control can occur.

Keep speed down when the road surface

is wet.

• At high speeds, the vehicle may be

affected by side winds. Therefore,

reduce speed and be prepared for unex-

pected buffeting, which can occur at the

exits of tunnels, when passing by a cut of

a hill, or when being overtaken by large

vehicles, etc.

Driving on Hills

77J029S

• When climbing steep hills, the car may

begin to slow down and show a lack of

power. If this happens, you should shift

to a lower gear so that the engine will

again be operating in its normal power

range. Shift rapidly to prevent the car

from losing momentum.

• When driving down a hill, the engine

should be used for braking by shifting to

next lower gear. (Do this with EITHER an

automatic or manual transaxle.)

WARNING

• Wear Your Seat Belts at All Times.

Even though air bags are equipped

at the front seating positions, the

driver and all passengers should

be properly restrained at all times,

using the seat belts provided. Refer

to the “Seat Belts and Child

Restraint Systems” section for

instructions on proper use of the

seat belts.

• Never drive while under the influ-

ence of alcohol or other drugs.

Alcohol and drugs can seriously

impair your ability to drive safely,

greatly increasing the risk of injury

to yourself and others. You should

also avoid driving when you are

tired, sick, irritated or under stress.

Highway Driving: NO

Driving on Hills: NO

7-2

DRIVING TIPS

80J21-03E

Driving on Slippery Roads

60G089S

Under wet road conditions you should

drive at a lower speed than on dry roads

due to possible slippage of tires during

braking. When driving on icy, snow-cov-

ered, or muddy roads, reduce your speed

and avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt

braking, or sharp steering movements.

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD)

Models

Your i-AWD provides greater traction on

slippery roads than 2-wheel drive models.

However, your i-AWD will not have as

much traction in deep snow, mud or sand

as multipurpose 4WD vehicles. You should

not attempt to drive your i-AWD in deep

snow, mud or sand. i-AWD models are not

sport/utility vehicles, and are not designed

for off-road use.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

If your vehicle gets stuck in snow, mud or

sand, follow the directions below:

1) Shift the transaxle back and forth

between a forward range (or first gear

for manual transaxle) and reverse. This

will create a rocking motion which may

give you enough momentum to free the

vehicle. Press gently on the accelerator

to keep wheel spinning to a minimum

wheel rpm. Remove your foot from the

accelerator while shifting.

Do not race the engine. Excessive

wheel spin will cause the tires to dig

deeper, making it more difficult to free

the vehicle.

2) If your vehicle remains stuck after a few

minutes of rocking, get another vehicle

to pull your vehicle out.

WARNING

Try not to hold the brake pedal down

too long or too often while going

down a steep or long hill. This could

cause the brakes to overheat, result-

ing in reduced braking efficiency.

Failure to take this precaution could

result in loss of vehicle control.

CAUTION

When descending a down hill,

NEVER turn the ignition key to the

“OFF” position. Emission control

system and automatic transaxle (if

equipped) damage may result.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to stand near the

vehicle when you are rocking it, and

do not spin the wheels faster than an

indicated 40 km/h (25 mph) on the

speedometer. Personal injury and/or

vehicle damage may result from spin-

ning the wheels too fast.

Driving on Hills: NO

Driving on Slippery Roads: NO

7-3

DRIVING TIPS

80J21-03E

Tire Chains

Tire chains should only be used if they are

needed to increase traction or are required

by law. Make sure that the chains you use

are small-link chains or cable-type chains

and are the correct size for your vehicle’s

tires. Also make sure that there is enough

clearance between the fenders and the

chains as installed on the tires.

Install the chains on the front tires tightly,

according to the chain manufacturer’s

instructions. Retighten the chains after

driving about 1.0 km (1/2 mile) if neces-

sary. With the chains installed, drive slowly.

Do not drive through deep or rushing

water

Driving in deep or rushing water can be

hazardous. You could lose control of the

vehicle and the occupants could drown.

Also, your vehicle could be seriously dam-

aged. To avoid these risks, observe the fol-

lowing instructions and precautions.

• Do not drive through deep or rushing

water. Deep or rushing water, such as

fast-moving streams or floodwaters,

could carry your vehicle away from your

intended path. The water is too deep if it

covers your wheel hubs, axles or

exhaust tailpipe. Know the depth of the

water before you attempt to drive

through it.

• If water blocks the tailpipe, the engine

may not start or run. If the water is deep

enough to get drawn into the engine

intake system, the engine will be badly

damaged.

• Submerged brakes will have poor brak-

ing performance. Drive slowly and care-

fully. Driving slowly will also help avoid

water splashing onto the ignition system,

which could cause the engine to stall.

• Even when driving through shallow or

still waters, drive carefully since the

water may be hiding ground hazards

such as holes, ditches or bumps.

54G638S

CAUTION

Do not continue rocking the vehicle

for more than a few minutes. Pro-

longed rocking can cause engine

overheating, transaxle or transfer

case damage or tire damage.

CAUTION

If you hear the chains hitting against

the vehicle body while driving, stop

and tighten them.

If your vehicle is equipped with full

wheel caps, remove the wheel caps

before installing the chains or the

wheel caps can be damaged by the

chain bands.

WARNING

In addition to following the driving

tips in this section, it is important to

observe the following precautions.

• Make sure your tires are in good

condition and always maintain the

specified tire pressure. Refer to

“Tires” in the “INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE” section for

details.

• Do not use tires other than those

specified by SUZUKI. Never use dif-

ferent sizes or types of tires on the

front and rear wheels. For informa-

tion regarding the specified tires,

refer to the Tire Information Label

located on the driver’s side door

pillar.

(Continued)

Driving on Slippery Roads: NO

7-4

DRIVING TIPS

80J21-03E

WARNING

(Continued)

• Never use oversized tires or special

shocks and springs to raise (jack

up) your vehicle. This will change

its handling characteristics. Over-

sized tires may also rub against the

fender over bumps, causing vehicle

damage or tire failure.

• After driving through water, test the

brakes while driving at a slow

speed to see if they have main-

tained their normal effectiveness. If

the brakes are less effective than

normal, dry them by repeatedly

applying the brakes while driving

slowly until the brakes have

regained their normal effective-

ness.

Driving on Slippery Roads: NO

7-5

DRIVING TIPS

80J21-03E

MEMO

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

80J21-03E

54G215

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

Vehicle Loading ................................................................... 8-1

Trailer Towing ...................................................................... 8-2

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) ...................... 8-2

8-1

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

80J21-03E

Vehicle Loading

80JS025

Your vehicle was designed for specific

weight capacities. The weight capacities of

your vehicle are indicated by the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR, front and rear)

and the Vehicle Capacity Weight. The

GVWR and GAWR (front and rear) are

listed on the Safety Certification Label

which is located below the driver’s side

door latch striker. The Vehicle Capacity

Weight is listed on the Tire Information

Label which is located below the Safety

Certification Label.

GVWR – Maximum permissible overall

weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including

all the occupants, accessories and cargo).

GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-

missible weight on an individual axle.

Vehicle Capacity Weight – Maximum per-

missible load weight a vehicle can carry

including the weight of all the occupants,

accessories and cargo.

The weight of any accessories already

installed on your vehicle at the time of pur-

chase, or that you or the dealer install after

purchase, must be subtracted from the

Vehicle Capacity Weight to determine how

much capacity remains available for occu-

pants and cargo. Contact your dealer for

further information.

Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and

actual loads at the front and rear axles can

only be determined by weighing the vehicle

using a vehicle scale. To measure the

weight and load, try taking your vehicle to

a highway weighing station, shipping com-

pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.

Compare these weights to the GVWR and

GAWR (front and rear) listed on the Safety

Certification Label. If the gross vehicle

weight or the load on either axle exceeds

these ratings, you must remove enough

weight to bring the load down to the rated

capacity.

WARNING

Never overload your vehicle. The

gross vehicle weight (sum of the

weights of the loaded vehicle, driver

and passengers) must never exceed

the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) listed on the Safety Certifica-

tion Label. In addition, never distrib-

ute a load so that the weight on either

the front or rear axle exceeds the

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

listed on the Safety Certification

Label.

WARNING

• Always distribute cargo evenly.

• To avoid personal injury or damage

to your vehicle, always secure

cargo to prevent it from shifting if

the vehicle moves suddenly.

• Place heavier objects on the floor

and as far forward in the trunk or in

the cargo area as possible.

• Never pile cargo higher than the

top of the seat backs.

Vehicle Loading: 11

8-2

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

80J21-03E

Trailer Towing

54G639

Do not use your vehicle to tow a trailer. The

vehicle is not designed or intended for

such use. Towing a trailer can adversely

affect handling, durability and fuel econ-

omy.

Towing Your Vehicle

(recreational towing)

Your vehicle may be towed behind another

vehicle (such as a motorhome), provided

you use the proper towing method speci-

fied for your vehicle. The towing method

you must use depends on the specifica-

tions of your vehicle: whether it is a 2-

wheel drive (2WD) or intelligent All Wheel

Drive (i-AWD) vehicle.

Use the towing instruction table to select

the proper towing method for your vehicle,

and carefully follow the corresponding

instructions. Be sure to use proper towing

equipment designed for recreational tow-

ing and make sure that towing speed does

not exceed 90 km/h (55 mph).

TOWING INSTRUCTION TABLE

80J010

WARNING

Always use a safety chain when tow-

ing your vehicle and be sure to

observe federal, state, and local

requirements for trailer hitches, tow

bars, lights, etc.

DRIVE

TRAIN

TRAN-

SAXLE

TOWING

METHOD

2WD

A/T (AUTO) A

M/T

(MANUAL) A B

i-AWD

including

2WD mode

A/T none

M/T B

CAUTION

For the automatic transaxle of intelli-

gent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) models,

don’t tow your vehicle behind

another vehicle such as a motor-

home, or the drive train may be seri-

ously damaged.

Trailer Towing: 5, 11, 13

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13

8-3

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

80J21-03E

54G212

TOWING METHOD A

FROM THE FRONT:

FRONT WHEELS ON A DOLLY

AND REAR WHEELS ON THE GROUND

A: 2WD (except 2WD mode of i-AWD)

VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRAN-

SAXLE OR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

1) Secure the front wheels on a towing

dolly according to the instructions pro-

vided by the dolly manufacturer.

2) Release the parking brake.

80J011

CAUTION

Towing the 2WD or i-AWD automatic

transaxle vehicles with four wheels

on the ground can result in damage

to the automatic transaxle.

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13

8-4

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

80J21-03E

80J013

TOWING METHOD B

FROM THE FRONT:

FOUR WHEELS ON THE GROUND

B: 2WD or i-AWD (including 2WD mode)

VEHICLES WITH MANUAL TRANSAXLE

1) Shift the manual transaxle lever into

neutral.

2) Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” posi-

tion to unlock the steering wheel.

3) Release the parking brake.

80J012

CAUTION

The steering column is not strong

enough to withstand shocks trans-

mitted from the front wheels during

towing. Always unlock the steering

wheel before towing.

CAUTION

Towing the 2WD or i-AWD automatic

transaxle vehicles with four wheels

on the ground can result in damage

to the automatic transaxle.

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing): 13

8-5

VEHICLE LOADING AND TOWING

80J21-03E

MEMO

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

60G410

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Schedule ....................................................... 9-2

Periodic Maintenance Schedule ........................................ 9-3

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving

Conditions ........................................................................... 9-7

Engine Oil and Filter ........................................................... 9-11

Gear Oil ................................................................................ 9-14

Automatic Transaxle Fluid ................................................. 9-16

Engine Coolant .................................................................... 9-17

Windshield Washer Fluid ................................................... 9-19

Air Cleaner ........................................................................... 9-19

Spark Plugs ......................................................................... 9-20

Brakes .................................................................................. 9-21

Steering Wheel .................................................................... 9-23

Clutch Pedal ........................................................................ 9-24

Tires ...................................................................................... 9-24

Battery .................................................................................. 9-35

Fuses .................................................................................... 9-35

Headlight Aiming ................................................................. 9-39

Bulb Replacement ............................................................... 9-39

Wiper Blades ....................................................................... 9-44

Air Conditioning System .................................................... 9-48

9-1

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

60A187S

WARNING

You should take extreme care when

working on your vehicle to prevent

accidental injury. Here are a few pre-

cautions that you should be espe-

cially careful to observe:

• To prevent damage or unintended

inflation of the air bag system, be

sure the battery is disconnected

and the ignition switch has been in

the “LOCK” position for at least 90

seconds before performing any

electrical service work on your

SUZUKI. Do not touch air bag sys-

tem components or wires. The

wires are wrapped with yellow tape

or yellow tubing, and the couplers

are yellow for easy identification.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not leave the engine running in

garages or other confined areas.

• When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, tools and other

objects away from the moving fan

and drive belt.

• When it is necessary to do service

work with the engine running, make

sure that the parking brake is set

fully and the transaxle is in Neutral

(for manual transaxle vehicles) or

Park (for automatic transaxle vehi-

cles).

• Do not touch ignition wires or other

ignition system parts when starting

the engine or when the engine is

running, or you could receive an

electric shock.

• Be careful not to touch a hot

engine, exhaust manifold and

pipes, muffler, radiator and water

hoses.

• Do not allow smoking, sparks or

flames around gasoline or the bat-

tery. Flammable fumes are present.

• Do not get under your vehicle if it is

supported only with the portable

jack provided in your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Be careful not to cause accidental

short circuits between the positive

and negative battery terminals.

• Keep used oil, engine coolant and

other fluids away from children and

pets. Dispose of used fluids prop-

erly; never pour them on the

ground, into sewers, etc.

9-2

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

NOTICE (for U.S.A.)

Maintenance, replacement or repair of

the emission control devices and sys-

tems may be performed by any automo-

bile repair establishment or individual

using any part which has been certified

under the provisions in the Clean Air

Act sec. 207. (a) (2).

Maintenance Schedule

The following table shows the times when

you should perform regular maintenance

on your vehicle. This table shows in miles,

kilometers and months when you should

perform inspections, adjustments, lubrica-

tion and other services. These intervals

should be shortened if driving is usually

done under severe conditions (refer to

“Maintenance Recommended Under

Severe Driving Conditions”).

WARNING

SUZUKI recommends that mainte-

nance on items marked with an aster-

isk (*) be performed by your

authorized SUZUKI dealer or a quali-

fied service technician. If you are

qualified, you may perform mainte-

nance on the unmarked items by

referring to the instructions in this

section. If you are not sure whether

you can successfully complete any of

the unmarked maintenance jobs, ask

your authorized SUZUKI dealer to do

the maintenance for you.

CAUTION

Whenever it becomes necessary to

replace parts on your vehicle, it is

recommended that you use genuine

SUZUKI replacement parts or their

equivalent.

WARNING

The shock absorbers are filled with

high pressure gas. Never attempt to

disassemble it or throw it into a fire.

Avoid storing it near a heater or heat-

ing device. When scrapping the

absorber, the gas must be released

from the absorber safely. Ask your

dealer for assistance.

Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-3

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Periodic Maintenance Schedule

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75

km (x 1000) 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100 112.5 125

months 7.5 1522.53037.54552.56067.575

ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL

1. Drive belt

*Tension check, *adjustment, *replacement – – – I – – – I – –

*2. Valve lash (clearance) – – – I – – – I – –

3. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – – – I – – – I – –

5. Engine coolant – – – R – – – R – –

*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – – – I – – – I – –

*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes – – – – – – – I – –

9. Spark plugs – – – – – – – R – –

*10. Ignition coil (plug cap) – – – I – – – I – –

*11. Fuel tank & cap – I – I – I – I – I

12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) – – – R – – – R – –

*13. Fuel filter – – – – – – – – – –

*14. Fuel lines and connections – – – I – – – I – –

*15. Canister air suction filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-4

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

#1: Inspect at 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months.

NOTE:

The maintenance services enclosed with rectangle are recommended maintenance items.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

km (x 1000) 137.5 150 162.5 175 187.5 200 212.5 225 237.5 250

months 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL

1. Drive belt

*Tension check, *adjustment, *replacement – I – – – I – – – I

*2. Valve lash (clearance) – I – – – I – – – I

3. Engine oil and oil filter R R R R R R R R R R

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – I – – – I – – – I

5. Engine coolant – R – – – R – – – R

*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – I – – – I – – – I

*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

*8. Emission-related hoses & tubes – – – – – I – – – I

9. Spark plugs – – – – – R – – – –

*10. Ignition coil (plug cap) – I – – – I – – – I

*11. Fuel tank & cap – I – I – I – I – I (#1)

12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) – R – – – R – – – R

*13. Fuel filter – – – – – – – – – R

*14. Fuel lines and connections – I – – – I – – – I (#1)

*15. Canister air suction filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform recom-

mended maintenance items enclosed with a rectangle will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion

of the vehicle’s useful life. SUZUKI, however, urges that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated inter-

vals and the maintenance recorded.

Periodic Maintenance Schedule: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-5

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75

km (x 1000) 12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5 75 87.5 100 112.5 125

months 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75

CHASSIS AND BODY

1. Clutch (for manual transaxle)

Pedal and fluid level – I – I – I – I – I

*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) I – I – I – I – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) I – I – I – I – I –

*3. Brake hoses and pipes I – I – I – I – I –

4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – I – I – I – R – I

5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – I – I – I – I – I

6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment I – I – I – I – I –

7. Tires (including tire rotation) I I I I I I I I I I

8. Wheel discs I I I I I I I I I I

*9. Suspension system I I I I I I I I I I

*10. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots I I I I I I I I I I

*11. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement I – – R – I – R – I

12. Automatic transaxle (A/T) Fluid level – I – I – I – I – I

*Fluid change Replace every 175000 km (105000 miles)-----4-speed A/T

*Fluid hose – – – – – I – – – –

*13. Transfer oil (i-AWD) I – – I – I – R – I

*14. Rear differential oil (i-AWD) R – – I – I – I – I

15. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage I I I I I I I I I I

16. Power steering (if equipped) I I I I I I I I I I

17. All latches, hinges and locks I I I I I I I I I I

18. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – I – R – I – R – I

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-

tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-6

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

NOTE:

This table shows the service schedule up to 250000 km (150000 miles).

Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.

Beyond 250000 km (150000 miles), the maintenance services enclosed with a rectangle are required.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

km (x 1000) 137.5 150 162.5 175 187.5 200 212.5 225 237.5 250

months 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150

CHASSIS AND BODY

1. Clutch (for manual transaxle)

Pedal and fluid level – I – I – I – I – I

*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) I – I – I – I – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) I – I – I – I – I –

*3. Brake hoses and pipes I – I – I – I – I –

4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – I – I – R – I – I

5. Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – I – I – I – I – I

6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment I – I – I – I – I –

7. Tires (including tire rotation) I I I I I I I I I I

8. Wheel discs I I I I I I I I I I

*9. Suspension system I I I I I I I I I I

*10. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots I I I I I I I I I I

*11. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement – R – I – R – I – R

12. Automatic transaxle (A/T) Fluid level – I – I – I – I – I

*Fluid change Replace every 175000 km (105000 miles)-----4-speed A/T

*Fluid hose – I – – – – – I – –

*13. Transfer oil (i-AWD) – I – I – R – I – I

*14. Rear differential oil (i-AWD) – I – I – I – I – I

15. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage I I I I I I I I I I

16. Power steering (if equipped) I I I I I I I I I I

17. All latches, hinges and locks I I I I I I I I I I

18. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped) – R – I – R – I – R

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Condi-

tions: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 9, 10

9-7

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving Conditions

Follow this schedule if your car is mainly operated under one or more of the following conditions:

• When most trips are less than 6 kilometers (4 miles)

• When most trips are less than 16 kilometers (10 miles) and outside temperature remain below freezing.

• Idling and/or low-speed operation in stop-and-go traffic.

• Operating in dusty areas.

Schedule should also be followed if the car is used for delivery service, police, taxi or other commercial applications.

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39

km (x 1000) 5 101520253035404550556065

months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39

ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL

1. Drive belt

*Tension check, *adjustment, *replacement ––––––––– I –––

*2.Valve lash (clearance) ––––––––– I –––

3. Engine oil and oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRRR

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections –––– I –––– I –––

5. Engine coolant –––––––––R–––

*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings –––– I –––– I –––

*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

*8.Emission-related hoses & tubes –––––––––––––

9. Spark plugs –––––––––––––

*10.Ignition coil (plug cap) ––––––––– I –––

*11. Fuel tank & cap –––– I –––– I –––

12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) IIIIIIIIIRIII

*13. Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 150 months

*14. Fuel lines and connections –––– I –––– I –––

*15. Canister air suction filter –––––––––––––

Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2

9-8

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75

km (x 1000) 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125

months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75

ENGINE & EMISSION CONTROL

1. Drive belt

*Tension check, *adjustment, *replacement –––––– I –––––

*2.Valve lash (clearance) –––––– I –––––

3. Engine oil and oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

*4. Cooling system hoses and connections – I –––– I –––– I

5. Engine coolant ––––––R–––––

*6. Exhaust pipes and mountings – I –––– I –––– I

*7. EVAP canister Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 180 months

*8.Emission-related hoses & tubes –––––– I –––––

9. Spark plugs ––––––R–––––

*10.Ignition coil (plug cap) –––––– I –––––

*11. Fuel tank & cap – I – – – – I – – – – I

12. Air cleaner filter element (paved road) IIIIIIRIIIII

*13. Fuel filter Replace every 250000 km (150000 miles) or 150 months

*14. Fuel lines and connections – I –––– I –––– I

*15. Canister air suction filter –––––––––––R

Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2

9-9

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39

km (x 1000) 5 101520253035404550556065

months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36 39

CHASSIS AND BODY

1. Clutch (for manual transaxle)

Pedal and fluid level –––– I –––– I –––

*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) – I – I – – – I – – – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) – I – I – – – I – – – I –

*3. Brake hoses and pipes – I – I – – – I – – – I –

4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement –––– I –––– I –––

5.Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment –––– I –––– I –––

6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment – I –– I –––– I –––

7. Tires (including tire rotation) – I – I – I – I – I – I –

8. Wheel discs – I – I – I – I – I – I –

*9. Wheel bearings – – – I – – – I – – – I –

*10. Suspension system – I – I – I – I – I – I –

*11. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots – I – I – I – I – I – I –

*12. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement ––––R––––R–––

13.Automatic transaxle (A/T) Fluid level –––– I –––– I –––

*Fluid change Replace every 80000 km (48000 miles)-----4-speed A/T

*Fluid hose –––––––––––––

*14. Transfer oil (i-AWD) ––––R––––R–––

*15.Rear differential oil (i-AWD) ––––R––––R–––

16. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage – I – I – I – I – I – I –

17. Power steering (if equipped) – I – I – I – I – I – I –

18. All latches, hinges and locks – I – I – I – I – I – I –

19. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*1– I – I – I – I – R – I –

Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2

9-10

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

R: Replace or change

I : Inspect, clean, adjust, lubricate or replace as necessary

NOTE:

This table shows the service schedule up to 125000 km (75000 miles).

Beyond 125000 km (75000 miles), perform the same services at the same intervals shown in the chart.

*1 Clean more frequently if the air flow from the air conditioner decreases.

Interval: This interval should be judged by odometer

reading or months, whichever comes first.

miles (x 1000) 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75

km (x 1000) 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125

months 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72 75

CHASSIS AND BODY

1. Clutch (for manual transaxle)

Pedal and fluid level – I – – – – I – – – – I

*2. Brake discs and pads (front, rear) – – I – – – I – – – I –

Brake drums and shoes (rear) – – I – – – I – – – I –

*3. Brake hoses and pipes – – I – – – I – – – I –

4. Brake fluid level check, *replacement – I – – – – R – – – – I

5.Brake pedal stroke check, *adjustment – I –––– I –––– I

6. Parking brake lever and *cable

Lever movement check, *adjustment – I –––– I –––– I

7. Tires (including tire rotation) I – I – I – I – I – I –

8.Wheel discs I–I–I–I–I–I–

*9. Wheel bearings – – I – – – I – – – I –

*10. Suspension system I – I – I – I – I – I –

*11. Propeller shafts (i-AWD)/Drive axle boots I – I – I – I – I – I –

*12. Manual transaxle oil

Level check, *replacement – R – – – – R – – – – R

13.Automatic transaxle (A/T) Fluid level – I –––– I –––– I

*Fluid change Replace every 80000 km (48000 miles)-----4-speed A/T

*Fluid hose – I ––––––––––

*14. Transfer oil (i-AWD) – R – – – – R – – – – R

*15.Rear differential oil (i-AWD) –R––––R––––R

16. Steering system

Steering wheel movement, *linkage I – I – I – I – I – I –

17. Power steering (if equipped) I – I – I – I – I – I –

18. All latches, hinges and locks I – I – I – I – I – I –

19. Air conditioner filter element (if equipped)*1I – I – I – R – I – I –

Engine Oil and Filter: 1, 2

Gear Oil: 6, 10

9-11

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Engine Oil and Filter

Specified Oil

52D083

(1) Preferred

Use engine oil with the American Petro-

leum Institute Certified For Gasoline

Engines “Starburst” symbol.

Select the appropriate oil viscosity accord-

ing to the above chart.

We highly recommend you use SAE 5W-

30 oil.

Oil Level Check

Engine oil dipstick

80G064

It is important to keep the engine oil at the

correct level for proper lubrication of your

vehicle’s engine. Check the oil level with

the vehicle on a level surface. The oil level

indication may be inaccurate if the vehicle

is on a slope. The oil level should be

checked either before starting the engine

or at least 5 minutes after stopping the

engine.

52D084

The handle of the engine oil dipstick is col-

ored yellow for easy identification.

Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe oil off with a

clean cloth, insert the dipstick all the way

into the engine, then remove it again. The

oil on the stick should be between the

upper and lower limits shown on the stick.

If the oil level indication is near the lower

limit, add enough oil to raise the level to the

upper limit.

CAUTION

Failure to use the recommended oil

can result in engine damage.

o-30

-22

-20

-4

-10

14 32 50 68 86 104

010203040

10W-30

(1)

5W-30

Temperature

EXAMPLE “Starburst”

EXAMPLE FULL

ADD

Gear Oil: 6, 10

9-12

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Refilling

81A147

Remove the oil filler cap and pour oil slowly

through the filler hole to bring the oil level

to the upper limit on the dipstick. Be careful

not to overfill. Too much oil is almost as

bad as too little oil. After refilling, start the

engine and allow it to idle for about a

minute. Stop the engine, wait about 5 min-

utes and check the oil level again.

Changing Engine Oil and Filter

60G306

Drain the engine oil while the engine is still

warm.

1) Remove the oil filler cap.

2) Place a drain pan under the drain plug.

3) Using a wrench, remove the drain plug

and drain out the engine oil.

4) Reinstall the drain plug and gasket.

Tighten the plug with a wrench to the

specified torque.

EXAMPLE

Open Close

WARNING

The engine oil temperature may be

high enough to burn your fingers

when the drain plug is loosened. Wait

until the drain plug is cool enough to

touch with your bare hands.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

New and used oil and solvent can be

hazardous. Children and pets may be

harmed by swallowing new or used

oil or solvent. Repeated, prolonged

contact with used engine oil may

cause [skin] cancer. Brief contact

with used oil or solvent may irritate

skin.

• Keep new and used oil and solvent

away from children and pets.

• Wear a long-sleeve shirt and water-

proof gloves.

• Wash with soap if oil or solvent

contacts your skin.

Tightening torque specification

35 Nm (25.3 lb-ft, 3.5 kg-m)

Automatic Transaxle Fluid: 10

9-13

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Replace the Oil Filter

60A198

1) Remove the engine under cover.

2) Using an oil filter wrench, turn the oil fil-

ter counterclockwise and remove it.

3) Using a clean rag, wipe off the mount-

ing surface on the engine where the

new filter will be seated.

4) Smear a little engine oil around the rub-

ber gasket of the new oil filter.

5) Screw on the new filter by hand until the

filter gasket contacts the mounting sur-

face.

54G093

(1) Oil filter

(2) 3/4 turn

6) Tighten the filter 3/4 turn from the point

of contact with the mounting surface (or

to the specified torque) using an oil filter

wrench.

Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks

1) Pour oil through the filler hole and

install the filler cap.

For the approximate capacity of the oil,

refer to the “Capacities” item in the

“SPECIFICATIONS” section.

2) Start the engine and look carefully for

leaks at the oil filter and drain plug. Run

the engine at various speeds for at least

5 minutes.

3) Stop the engine and wait about 5 min-

utes. Check the oil level again and add

oil if necessary. Check for leaks again.

CAUTION

To tighten the oil filter properly, it is

important to accurately identify the

position at which the filter gasket

first contacts the mounting surface.

Tightening torque specification

14 Nm (10.0 lb-ft, 1.4 kg-m)

CAUTION

To prevent oil leakage, make sure

that the oil filter is tight, but do not

overtighten it.

CAUTION

When replacing the oil filter, it is rec-

ommended that you use a genuine

SUZUKI replacement filter. If you use

an after-market filter, make sure it is

of equivalent quality and carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions

and precautions.

Automatic Transaxle Fluid: 10

Engine Coolant: 1, 2

9-14

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

80J014

Gear Oil

Specified Gear Oil

Manual transaxle (API GL-4)

54G095

Rear differential oil (i-AWD)/Transfer oil

of automatic transaxle model (i-AWD)

(API GL-5 Hypoid)

54G096

When replacing gear oil, use the appropri-

ate viscosity and grade as shown in the

charts below.

We highly recommend you use:

API GL-4 SAE 75W-90 for manual tran-

saxle gear oil

API GL-5 hypoid gear oil SAE 80W-90 for

rear differential oil (i-AWD) and transfer oil

of automatic transaxle model (i-AWD)

CAUTION

Oil leaks from around the oil filter or

drain plug indicate incorrect installa-

tion or gasket damage. If you find any

leaks or are not sure that the filter

has been properly tightened, have

the vehicle inspected by your SUZUKI

dealer.

EXAMPLE API GRADE

Manual transaxle GL-4

Rear differential oil

(i-AWD)/Transfer oil

(i-AWD A/T)

GL-5 (Hypoid

gear oil)

Engine Coolant: 1, 2

9-15

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Manual transaxle

54G097

Transfer case (i-AWD)

80J007

(1) Oil filler and level plug

Rear differential (i-AWD)

80J015

(1) Oil filler and level plug

Tightening torque

Gear Oil Level Check

The manual transaxle, transfer gears (i-

AWD A/T) and rear differential (i-AWD) are

lubricated with gear oil. To check the gear

oil level in any of the above locations, use

the following procedure:

1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. Set

parking brake and stop the engine.

2) Remove the oil filler plug (1).

3) Check the inside of the hole with your

finger. If the oil level comes up to the

bottom of the plug hole, the oil level is

correct. If so, reinstall the plug.

4) If the oil level is low, add gear oil

through the filler plug hole (1) until the

oil level reaches the bottom of the filler

hole.

Gear Oil Replacement

Since special procedures, materials and

tools are required to change the automatic

transaxle oil, it is recommended that you

trust this job to your authorized SUZUKI

dealer.

(1)

Oil Filler Plug

Manual transaxle

21 Nm

(15.2 lb-ft)

(2.1 kg-m)

Transfer 23 Nm

(16.6 lb-ft)

(2.3 kg-m)

Rear differential

(1)

Engine Coolant: 1, 2

Windshield Washer Fluid: 3

9-16

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

Specified Fluid

Use an automatic transaxle fluid equivalent

to DEXRON®-III.

Fluid Level Check

You must check the fluid level with the

automatic transaxle fluid at normal operat-

ing temperature.

To check the fluid level:

1) To warm up the transaxle fluid, drive the

vehicle or idle the engine until the tem-

perature gauge indicates normal oper-

ating temperature.

2) Then drive for ten more minutes.

NOTE:

Do not check the fluid level if you have just

driven the vehicle for a long time at high

speed, or if you have driven in city traffic in

hot weather. Wait until the fluid cools down

(about 30 minutes), or the fluid level indica-

tion will not be correct.

3) Park your vehicle on level ground.

4) Apply the parking brake and then start

the engine in “P” (Park). Let it idle for

two minutes and keep it running during

the fluid level check.

5) With your foot on the brake pedal, move

the gearshift lever through each gear,

pausing for about three seconds in

each range. Then move it back to the

“P” (Park) position.

75F086

54G317

(1) FULL

(2) LOW

(3) The lowest point = Fluid level

6) The handle of the A/T fluid dipstick is

colored red for easy identification.

Remove the dipstick, clean it and push

it back in until the cap seats. Pull out

the dipstick and read the fluid level.

The fluid level should be between the

two marks in the “HOT” range on the

dipstick.

7) Add just enough specified fluid through

the dipstick hole to fill the transaxle to

the proper level. It takes only 0.4 liters

(0.85 US pt) for 4-speed automatic tran-

saxle to raise the level from “LOW” to

“FULL”.

CAUTION

Driving with too much or too little

fluid can damage the transaxle.

WARNING

Be sure to depress the brake pedal

when moving the gearshift lever, or

the vehicle can move suddenly.

(1) (2)

(3) (1)

(2)

(3)

Windshield Washer Fluid: 3

Air Cleaner: 1, 2

9-17

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Changing Oil

Since special procedures, materials and

tools are required to change the automatic

transaxle oil, it is recommended that you

trust this job to your authorized SUZUKI

dealer.

Engine Coolant

56KN049

60A208

Selection of Coolant

To maintain optimum performance and

durability of your engine, use SUZUKI

Genuine Coolant or equivalent.

This type of coolant is best for your cooling

system as it:

• Helps maintain proper engine tempera-

ture.

• Gives proper protection against freezing

and boiling.

• Gives proper protection against corro-

sion and rust.

Failure to use the proper coolant can dam-

age your cooling system. Your authorized

SUZUKI dealer can help you select the

proper coolant.

CAUTION

After checking or adding oil, be sure

to insert the dipstick securely.

EXAMPLE

FULL

LOW

CAUTION

To avoid damaging your cooling sys-

tem:

• Always use a high quality ethylene

glycol base phosphate type coolant

diluted with distilled water at the

correct mixture concentration.

• Make sure that the proper mix is 50/

50 coolant to distilled water and in

no case higher than 70/30. Concen-

trations greater than 70/30 coolant

to distilled water will cause over-

heating conditions.

• Do not use straight coolant nor

plain water.

(Continued)

Spark Plugs: 1, 2

9-18

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Coolant Level Check

Check the engine coolant level at the

reserve tank, not at the radiator. With the

engine cool, the engine coolant level

should be between the “FULL” and “LOW”

marks.

Adding Coolant

If the engine coolant level is below the

“LOW” mark, more engine coolant should

be added. Remove the reserve tank cap

and add engine coolant until the reserve

tank level reaches the “FULL” mark. Never

fill the reserve tank above the “FULL” mark.

Coolant Replacement

Since special procedures are required, we

recommend you take your vehicle to your

SUZUKI dealer for coolant replacement.

CAUTION

(Continued)

• Do not add extra inhibitors or addi-

tives. They may not be compatible

with your cooling system.

• Do not mix different types of base

coolants. Doing so may result in

accelerated seal wear and/or the

possibility of severe overheating

and extensive engine/automatic

transaxle damage.

CAUTION

• The mixture you use should con-

tain 50% concentration of anti-

freeze.

• If the lowest ambient temperature

in your area is expected to be –

35°C (–31°F) or below, use higher

concentrations up to 60% following

the instructions on the antifreeze

container.

• When putting the cap on the reser-

voir tank, line up the arrow on the

cap and the arrow on the tank. Fail-

ure to follow this can result in cool-

ant leakage.

WARNING

Engine coolant is harmful or fatal if

swallowed or inhaled. Do not drink

antifreeze or coolant solution. If swal-

lowed, do not induce vomiting. Imme-

diately contact a poison control

center or a physician. Avoid inhaling

mist or hot vapors; if inhaled, remove

to fresh air. If coolant gets in eyes,

flush eyes with water and seek medi-

cal attention. Wash thoroughly after

handling. Solution can be poisonous

to animals. Keep out of the reach of

children and animals.

Brakes: 6

9-19

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Windshield Washer Fluid

65D108

80J008

Check that there is washer fluid in the tank

by looking at the washer fluid level gauge

which is attached to the cap of the washer

fluid tank. If the fluid level is near “E” mark,

refill it.

Use a good quality windshield washer

fluid, diluted with water as necessary.

Air Cleaner

80J003

If the air cleaner is clogged with dust, there

will be greater intake resistance, resulting

in decreased power output and increased

fuel consumption.

Unclamp the side clamps, and remove the

element from the air cleaner case. If it

appears to be dirty, replace it with a new

one.

(or opposite side)

WARNING

Do not use “anti-freeze” solution in

the windshield washer reservoir. This

can severely impair visibility when

sprayed on the windshield, and also

damage your vehicle’s paint.

CAUTION

Damage may result if the washer

motor is operated with no fluid in the

washer tank.

CAUTION

The air cleaner element should be

replaced every 50000 km (30000

miles). More frequent replacement is

necessary when you drive under

dusty conditions.

Brakes: 6

9-20

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Spark Plugs

65D180

You should inspect spark plugs periodically

for carbon deposits. When carbon accu-

mulates on a spark plug, a strong spark

may not be produced. Remove carbon

deposits with a wire or pin and adjust the

spark plug gap.

To access the spark plugs,

1) disconnect the coupler while pushing

the release lever,

2) remove the bolt, and

3) pull the ignition coil out.

80G093

EXAMPLE

CAUTION

• When servicing the iridium/plati-

num spark plugs (slender center

electrode type plugs), do not touch

the center electrode, as it is easy to

damage.

• When installing the spark plugs,

screw them in with your fingers to

avoid stripping the threads. Tighten

with a torque wrench to 25 Nm (2.5

kg-m, 18.0 lb-ft). Do not allow con-

taminants to enter the engine

through the spark plug holes when

the plugs are removed.

• Never use spark plugs with the

wrong thread size.

CAUTION

When replacing spark plugs, you

should use the brand and type speci-

fied for your vehicle. For the speci-

fied plugs, refer to the

“SPECIFICATIONS” section at the

end of this book. If you wish to use a

brand of spark plug other than the

specified plugs, consult your SUZUKI

dealer.

1.0 – 1.1 mm

(0.039 – 0.043 in.)

Brakes: 6

Steering Wheel: 6

9-21

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Brakes

Brake Fluid

80J004

Check the brake fluid level by looking at

the reservoir in the engine compartment.

Check that the fluid level is between the

“MAX” and “MIN” lines. If the brake fluid

level is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the

“MAX” line with DOT3 brake fluid.

80J104

EXAMPLE

WARNING

Failure to follow the guidelines below

can result in personal injury or seri-

ous damage to the brake system.

• If the brake fluid in the reservoir

drops below a certain level, the

brake warning light on the instru-

ment panel will come on (the

engine must be running with the

parking brake fully disengaged.)

Should the light come on, immedi-

ately ask your SUZUKI dealer to

inspect the brake system.

• A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in

the brake system which should be

inspected by your SUZUKI dealer

immediately.

• Brake fluid can harm your eyes and

damage painted surfaces. Use cau-

tion when refilling the reservoir.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not use any fluid other than

DOT3 brake fluid. Do not use

reclaimed fluid or fluid that has

been stored in old or open contain-

ers. It is essential that foreign parti-

cles and other liquids are kept out

of the brake fluid reservoir.

WARNING

Brake fluid is harmful or fatal if swal-

lowed, and harmful if it comes in con-

tact with skin or eyes. If swallowed,

do not induce vomiting. Immediately

contact a poison control center or a

physician. If brake fluid gets in eyes,

flush eyes with water and seek medi-

cal attention. Wash thoroughly after

handling. Solution can be poisonous

to animals. Keep out of the reach of

children and animals.

CAUTION

The brake fluid should be replaced

according to the maintenance sched-

ule. Have the brake fluid replaced by

your SUZUKI dealer.

Clutch Pedal: 6

Tires: 6

9-22

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

NOTE:

With disc brakes, the fluid level can be

expected to gradually fall as the brake

pads wear.

Brake Pedal

65D345

With the engine running and the parking

brake set, measure the distance between

the brake pedal and floor carpet when the

pedal is depressed with approximately 300

N (66 lbs, 30 kg) of force. The minimum

distance required is as specified. Since

your vehicle’s brake system is self-adjust-

ing, there is no need for pedal adjustment.

If the pedal to floor carpet distance as

measured above is less than the minimum

distance required, have your vehicle

inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.

60G104

NOTE:

When measuring the distance between the

brake pedal and floor wall, be sure not to

include the floor mat or rubber on the floor

wall in your measurement.

Pedal to floor carpet minimum distance

“a”

40 mm (1.6 in.)

“a”

Floor carpet

WARNING

If you experience any of the following

problems with your vehicle’s brake

system, have the vehicle inspected

immediately by your SUZUKI dealer.

• Poor braking performance

• Uneven braking (Brakes not work-

ing uniformly on all wheels.)

• Excessive pedal travel

• Brake dragging

• Excessive noise

• (Except ABS equipped vehicle)

Pedal pulsation (Pedal pulsates

when pressed for braking.)

Tires: 6

9-23

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Parking Brake Lever

60A226

Check the parking brake for proper adjust-

ment by counting the number of clicks

made by the ratchet teeth as you slowly

pull up on the parking brake lever to the

point of full engagement. The parking

brake lever should stop between the speci-

fied ratchet teeth and the rear wheels

should be securely locked. If the parking

brake is not properly adjusted or the

brakes drag after the lever has been fully

released, have the parking brake inspected

and/or adjusted by your SUZUKI dealer.

Steering Wheel

80J005

Check the play of the steering wheel by

gently turning it from left to right and mea-

suring the distance that it moves before

you feel slight resistance. The play should

be between the specified values. Check

that the steering wheel turns easily and

smoothly without rattling by turning it all the

way to the right and to the left while driving

very slowly in an open area. If the amount

of free play is outside the specification or

you find anything else to be wrong, an

inspection must be performed by your

SUZUKI dealer.

Power Steering (if equipped)

54G225

(1) UPPER

(2) LOWER

Check the steering box case, vane pump

and hose connections for leaks or damage.

Power Steering Fluid

Check the fluid level by looking at the res-

ervoir in the engine compartment when the

fluid is cold (about room temperature).

Check that the fluid level is between the

“UPPER” and “LOWER” lines. If the fluid

level is near the “LOWER” line, fill it up to

the “UPPER” line with an automatic tran-

saxle fluid equivalent to ATF DEXRON®-II

(Esso JWS 2326) or DEXRON®-III. Do not

overfill.

Ratchet tooth specification “b”

4th – 9th

200 N (44 lbs, 20 kg)

“b”

Steering wheel play “c”

0 – 30 mm (0.0 – 1.2 in.)

“c”

EXAMPLE

Tires: 6

9-24

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Clutch Pedal

80J004

Check the clutch pedal for smooth opera-

tion and clutch fluid level from time to time.

If clutch dragging is felt with the pedal fully

depressed, have the clutch inspected by

your SUZUKI dealer. If the clutch fluid level

is near the “MIN” line, fill it up to the “MAX”

line with DOT3 brake fluid.

Tires

For safe operation of your vehicle, it is

important that the tires be the correct type

and size, in good condition, and properly

inflated. Be sure to follow the requirements

and recommendations in this section.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire is molded

into its sidewall. The example below shows

a typical passenger car tire.

Typical Passenger Car Tire Sidewall

67D027

A. Tire Manufacturer

The name of the tire manufacturer is

shown here.

B. Tire Name/Model

The tire name or model is shown

here.

C. Tire Size

The tire size code is a combination of

letters and numbers used to define a

particular tire’s width, height, aspect

ratio, construction type, and service

description. See the “Tire Size” expla-

nation later in this section for more

details.

D. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number

The Department of Transportation

(DOT) marking indicates that the tire

is in compliance with the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. The letters and

numbers following the DOT marking

is the Tire Identification Number

(TIN). The TIN identifies the tire man-

ufacturer and plant, tire size, and date

the tire was manufactured.

E. Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)

Tire manufacturers are required to

grade tires based on three perfor-

mance factors: treadwear, traction

and temperature resistance. Refer to

the “Uniform Tire Quality Grading”

section for more details.

F. Load Rating

Load rating is the maximum weight a

tire is designed to support in normal

service.

G. Max Inflation Pressure

Max inflation pressure is the maxi-

mum inflation pressure a tire is

designed for.

Tires: 6

9-25

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

H. Tire Ply Material

These tire markings describe the type

of cord and number of plies in the

sidewall and under the tread.

I. Load Index and Speed Rating

The two- or three-digit number is the

tire’s load index, the maximum load a

tire can carry at the speed indicated

by its speed symbol at the maximum

inflation pressure. The higher the

number is, the greater the load carry-

ing capacity. The letter symbol

denotes the speed at which a tire is

designed to be driven for extended

periods of time. (Ratings are listed

below.)

*The letters ZR may be used on tires with a

maximum speed capability over 149 mph

and will always be used on tires with a

maximum speed capability over 186 mph.

J. M+S Marking

This marking indicates the tire has

some mud and snow capabilities and

is designed for all-season use.

Tire Size

The following illustration shows an exam-

ple of a typical passenger car tire size.

67D028

A. Tire Type

This letter code indicates the primary

intended use of the tire. The letter “P”

identifies a tire primarily intended for

use on a passenger vehicle.

B. Tire Width

This three-digit number indicates the

tire section width in millimeters from

sidewall to sidewall.

C. Aspect Ratio

This two-digit number represents the

tire section height divided by the tire

section width.

D. Construction Code

This letter code is used to indicate the

type of ply construction in the tire. The

letter “R” means radial ply tire con-

struction, the letter “D” means diago-

nal or bias ply construction, and the

letter “B” means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

E. Rim Diameter

This two-digit number is the wheel or

rim diameter in inches.

Letter Rating Speed Rating

Q 99 mph

R106 mph

S112 mph

T118 mph

U124 mph

H130 mph

V149 mph

W 168 mph*

Y 186 mph*

A B C D E

WARNING

Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires

which are all the same type and size.

This is important to ensure proper

steering and handling of the vehicle.

Never mix tires of different size or

type on the four wheels of your vehi-

cle. Mixing tires could cause you to

lose control while driving which may

lead to an accident. The size and type

of tires used should be only those

approved by SUZUKI Motor Corpora-

tion as standard or optional equip-

ment for your vehicle.

Tires: 6

9-26

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Tire Inflation Pressure

Tire inflation pressure should be checked

when the tire is cold. “Cold tire inflation

pressure” is the pressure in a tire that has

been driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) or

has been standing for three hours or more.

80JS025

The front and rear tire pressure specifica-

tions for your vehicle are shown below and

are listed on the Tire and Loading Informa-

tion Label, which is located on the driver’s

door lock pillar. The Tire and Loading Infor-

mation Label contains the following infor-

mation:

• Seating Capacity

• Maximum Allowed Combined Weight of

Occupants and Cargo

• Original Tire Size

• Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure of Original Tires

• Size of Compact Spare Tire

• Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-

sure of Compact Spare Tire

NOTE:

The tire inflation pressure will change due

to changes in atmospheric pressure, tem-

perature or tire temperature when driving.

To reduce the chance that the low tire

pressure warning light will come on due to

normal changes in temperature and atmo-

spheric pressure, it is important to check

and adjust the tire pressures when the

tires are cold. Tires that appear to be at the

specified pressure when checked after

driving, when the tires are warm, could

have pressure below the specification

when the tires cool down. Also, tires that

are inflated to the specified pressure in a

warm garage may have pressure below the

specification when the vehicle is driven

outside in very cold temperature. If you

adjust the tire pressure in a garage that is

warmer than the outside temperature, you

should add 1 psi to the recommended cold

tire inflation pressure for every 10°F differ-

ence between garage temperature and

outside temperature.

Measuring Air Pressure

Use the following steps to achieve proper

tire inflation:

1) Identify the recommended tire pressure

on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading Infor-

mation Label or in the owner’s manual.

2) Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem.

3) Using a reliable pressure gauge, mea-

sure the tire inflation pressure by press-

ing the tire gauge firmly onto the valve

to get a pressure measurement.

Remember that inflation pressures

should be checked when the tires are

“cold”, meaning before they have been

driven one mile or after sitting for three

hours or more allowing the tire to cool

to ambient air temperature.

4) If the air pressure is too high, slowly

release the air by pressing on the tire

valve stem with the edge of the tire

gauge until you reach the correct pres-

sure.

5) If the air pressure is too low, fill the tire

with air at a service station until it

reaches the recommended pressure.

6) Make sure all tires have the same air

pressure (unless the owner’s manual

indicates otherwise).

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressures

Front Tires 230 kPa

33 psi

Rear Tires 230 kPa

33 psi

Compact Spare Tire 420 kPa

60 psi

Tires: 6

9-27

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Tire Inspection

Inspect your vehicle’s tires at least once a

month by performing the following checks:

1) Measure the air pressure with a tire

gauge. Adjust the pressure if neces-

sary. Remember to check the spare

tire, too. Refer to the “Measuring Air

Pressure” section.

54G136

(1) Tread wear indicator

(2) Indicator location mark

2) Check that the depth of the tread

groove is more than 1.6 mm (0.06 in.).

To help you check this, the tires have

molded-in tread wear indicators in the

grooves. When the indicators appear

on the tread surface, the remaining

depth of the tread is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)

or less and the tire should be replaced.

3) Check for abnormal wear, cracks and

damage. Any tires with cracks or other

damage should be replaced. If any tires

show abnormal wear, have them

inspected by your SUZUKI dealer.

4) Check for loose wheel nuts.

5) Check that there are no nails, stones or

other objects sticking into the tires.

WARNING

• Air pressures should be checked

when the tires are cold or you may

get inaccurate readings.

• Check the inflation pressure from

time to time while inflating the tire

gradually, until the specified pres-

sure is obtained.

• Never underinflate or overinflate

the tires.

Underinflation can cause unusual

handling characteristics or can

cause the rim to slip on the tire

bead, resulting in an accident or

damage to the tire or rim.

Underinflation can also cause tires

to overheat, leading to tire failure.

Overinflation can cause the tire to

burst, resulting in personal injury.

Overinflation can also cause

unusual handling characteristics

which may result in an accident.

WARNING

Hitting curbs and running over rocks

can damage tires and affect wheel

alignment. Be sure to have tires and

wheel alignment checked periodically

by your SUZUKI dealer.

WARNING

Your SUZUKI is equipped with tires

which are all the same type and size.

This is important to ensure proper

steering and handling of the vehicle.

Never mix tires of different size or

type on the four wheels of your vehi-

cle. The size and type of tires used

should be only those approved by

SUZUKI Motor Corporation as stan-

dard or optional equipment for your

vehicle.

Tires: 6

9-28

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

The U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration has developed a grading

system for evaluating the performance of

passenger car tires. The following informa-

tion will help you understand the grading

system, which applies to vehicles sold in

the U.S. Consult your SUZUKI dealer or

tire retailer for help in choosing the correct

replacement tires for your vehicle.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

DOT Quality Grades

Treadwear

Traction AA A B C

Temperature A B C

All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform To

Federal Safety Requirements in Addition

To These Grades

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades rep-

resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet

pavement as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

CAUTION

For intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-

AWD) models, replacing a tire with

one of a different size, or using differ-

ent brands among the four tires can

result in damage to the drive train.

WARNING

Replacing the wheels and tires

equipped on your vehicle with certain

combinations of aftermarket wheels

and tires can significantly change the

steering and handling characteris-

tics of your vehicle. Oversized tires

may also rub against the fender over

bumps, causing vehicle damage or

tire failure. Therefore, use only those

wheel and tire combinations

approved by SUZUKI Motor Corpora-

tion as standard or optional equip-

ment for your vehicle. For

information regarding the specified

tires, refer to the Tire Information

Label located on the driver’s side

door pillar or the “SPECIFICATIONS”

section.

CAUTION

Replacing the original tires with tires

of a different size may result in false

speedometer or odometer readings.

Check with your SUZUKI dealer

before purchasing replacement tires

that differ in size from the original

tires.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering,

hydroplaning or peak traction charac-

teristics.

Tires: 6

9-29

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of

performance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

Tire Rotation

54G114

To avoid uneven wear of your tires and to

prolong their life, rotate the tires as illus-

trated. Tires should be rotated as recom-

mended in the periodic maintenance

schedule. After rotation, adjust front and

rear tire pressures to the specification

listed on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading

Information Label.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly

inflated and not overloaded. Exces-

sive speed, underinflation or exces-

sive loading, either separately or in

combination, can cause heat buildup

and possible tire failure.

WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the

parts to which it is fastened, can

make wheel nuts become loose after

a time. The wheel could come off and

cause an accident. When you change

a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from

places where the wheel attaches to

the vehicle. In an emergency, you can

use a cloth or a paper towel to do

this; but be sure to use a scraper or

wire brush later, if you need to, to get

all the rust or dirt off.

Tires: 6

9-30

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Compact Spare Tire (if equipped)

54G115

(1) Wear indicator

(2) Indicator location mark

Your vehicle comes equipped with the

compact spare tire. The compact spare is

designed to save space in your storage

area, and its lighter weight makes it easier

to install if a flat tire occurs. It is only

intended for temporary emergency use,

until the conventional tire can be repaired

or replaced. The inflation pressure of the

compact spare tire should be checked at

least monthly. Use a quality pocket-type

inflation pressure gauge and set at 420

kPa (60 psi). At the same time, check that

the tire is stored securely. If it is not, tighten

it.

Note that two or more compact spare tires

should not be used on one vehicle simulta-

neously.

WARNING

The compact spare tire and wheel are

intended for temporary emergency

use only. Continuous use of this

spare can result in tire failure and

loss of control. Always observe these

precautions when using this spare:

• Your vehicle will handle differently

with this temporary spare.

• Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph)

speed.

• Replace this spare with a standard

tire and wheel as soon as possible.

• Use of this spare will reduce

ground clearance.

• Recommended air pressure for this

spare is 420 kPa (60 psi).

• Do not use tire chains on the com-

pact spare. If you must use tire

chains, rearrange the wheels so

standard tires and wheels are fitted

to the front axle.

• The compact spare tire has a much

shorter tread life than the conven-

tional tires on your vehicle.

Replace the tire as soon as the

tread wear indicator appears.

• When replacing the compact tire,

use a replacement tire with the

exact same size and construction.

CAUTION

For intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-

AWD) models, driving with an under-

inflated compact spare tire or over 80

km/h (50 mph) while using a compact

spare tire can result in damage to the

drive train.

Tires: 6

9-31

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Changing Wheels

SX4

80JC014

SX4 SEDAN

80JC045

To change a wheel, use the following pro-

cedure:

1) Remove the jack, tools and spare wheel

from the vehicle.

2) Loosen, but do not remove the wheel

nuts.

3) Jack up the vehicle (follow the jacking

instructions in the “EMERGENCY SER-

VICE” section in this manual).

4) Remove the wheel nuts and wheel.

5) Install the new wheel and replace the

wheel nuts with their cone shaped end

facing the wheel. Tighten each nut

snugly by hand until the wheel is

securely seated on the hub.

81A057

6) Lower the jack and fully tighten the nuts

(to the specified torque) in a crisscross

fashion with a wrench as shown in the

illustration.

Snow Tires

Your vehicle is equipped with all-season

tires which are designed for use in summer

and most winter conditions. For improved

traction in severe winter conditions,

SUZUKI recommends mounting radial

snow tires on all four wheels. Snow tires

must be the same size as the standard

tires. Also be sure to use the tires of the

same type and brand on all four wheels of

your vehicle.

Wheel tightening torque

85 Nm (61.5 lb-ft, 8.5 kg-m)

Tires: 6

Battery: 9

9-32

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOL-

OGY

Accessory Weight – the combined weight

(in excess of those standard items which

may be replaced) of automatic transaxle,

power steering, power brakes, power win-

dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to

the extent that these items are available as

factory-installed equipment (whether

installed or not).

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure – the pressure

in a tire that has been driven less than 1

mile or has been standing for three hours

or more.

Curb Weight – the weight of a motor vehi-

cle with standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,

and, if so equipped, air conditioning and

additional weight optional engine.

Intended Outboard Sidewall – (1) the side-

wall that contains a whitewall, bears white

lettering or bears manufacturer, brand,

and/or model name molding that is higher

or deeper than the same molding on the

other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward

facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that

has a particular side that must always face

outward when mounted on a vehicle.

Maximum Inflation Pressure – the maxi-

mum cold inflation pressure a tire is

designed to support in normal service.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight – the

sum of curb weight, accessory weight,

vehicle capacity weight (total load capac-

ity), and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight – 68 kilograms

times the number of occupants specified in

the second column of Table 1 (shown

below).

Occupant distribution – distribution of

occupants in a vehicle as specified in the

third column of Table 1 (shown below).

Production Options Weight – the combined

weight of those installed regular production

options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in

excess of those standard items which they

replace, not previously considered in curb

weight or accessory weight, including

heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack,

heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Recommended Inflation Pressure – the

cold tire inflation pressure recommended

by a manufacturer.

Rim – metal support for a tire or tire and

tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated.

Vehicle Capacity Weight – the rated cargo

and luggage load plus 68 kilograms (150

lbs) times the vehicle’s designated seating

capacity.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire – the

load on an individual tire that is determined

by distributing to each axle its share of the

maximum loaded vehicle weight and divid-

ing by two.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire – the load

on an individual tire that is determined by

distributing to each axle its share of the

curb weight, accessory weight, and normal

occupant weight (distributed in accordance

with Table 1 shown below) and dividing by

TABLE 1 – Occupant Loading and Dis-

tribution For Vehicle Normal Load For

Various Designated Seating Capacities

Designated

seating capac-

ity, number of

occupants

Vehicle nor-

mal load, num-

ber of

occupants

Occupant

distribution in

a normally

loaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in

second seat

Fuses: 7

9-33

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Vehicle Loading

Your vehicle was designed for specific load

capacities. The load capacities of your

vehicle are indicated by the Gross Vehicle

Weight Rating (GVWR), the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR, front and rear), and

the total load capacity, the seating capac-

ity, and the cargo load capacity. The

GVWR and GAWR (front and rear) are

listed on the Safety Certification Label

which is located below the driver’s side

door latch striker. The total load capacity

and seating capacity are listed on the Tire

and Loading Information Label which is

located below the Safety Certification

Label. The cargo load capacity can be

determined as described below.

Cargo Load Capacity – Maximum weight

of cargo and luggage that the vehicle can

safely carry. Cargo load capacity is the dif-

ference between the total load capacity of

the vehicle and the total combined weight

of all vehicle occupants. Refer to “Steps for

Determining Correct Load Limit” for details

on how to determine cargo load capacity.

GVWR – Maximum permissible overall

weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including

all the occupants, accessories and cargo

plus the trailer tongue weight if towing a

trailer).

GAWR – (Front and Rear) Maximum per-

missible weight on an individual axle.

Seating Capacity – Maximum number of

occupants the vehicle is designed to carry.

NOTE:

Even though the number of occupants is

within the seating capacity, you still must

make sure that you do not exceed the total

load capacity of the vehicle.

Total Load Capacity – Maximum permissi-

ble weight a vehicle can carry including the

weight of all the occupants, accessories,

cargo, plus trailer tongue weight (if towing

a trailer).

The weight of any accessories already

installed on your vehicle at the time of pur-

chase, or that you or the dealer install after

purchase, must be subtracted from the

total load capacity to determine how much

capacity remains available for occupants,

cargo, and trailer tongue weight (if towing a

trailer). Contact your dealer for further

information.

Actual weight of the loaded vehicle and

actual loads at the front and rear axles can

only be determined by weighing the vehicle

using a vehicle scale. To measure the

weight and load, try making your vehicle to

a highway weighing station, shipping com-

pany or inspection station for trucks, etc.

Compare these weights to the GVWR and

GAWR (front and rear) listed on the Safety

Certification Label. If the gross vehicle

weight or the load on either axle exceeds

these ratings, you must remove enough

weight to bring the load down to the rated

capacity.

WARNING

Never overload your vehicle. Over-

loading your vehicle can cause dam-

age to your tires and lead to poor

steering and braking which can result

in an accident. The gross vehicle

weight (sum of the weights of the

loaded vehicle, driver and passen-

gers) must never exceed the Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) listed

on the Safety Certification Label. In

addition, never distribute a load so

that the weight on either the front or

rear axle exceeds the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) listed on the

Safety Certification Label.

WARNING

• Always distribute cargo evenly.

• To avoid personal injury or damage

to your vehicle, always secure

cargo to prevent it from shifting if

the vehicle moves suddenly.

• Place heavier objects on the floor

and as far forward in the cargo area

as possible. Never pile cargo

higher than the top of the seat-

backs.

Fuses: 7

9-34

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Steps for Determining Correct Load

Limit

1) Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on

your vehicle’s placard.

2) Determine the combined weight of the

driver and passengers that will be riding

in your vehicle.

3) Subtract the combined weight of the

driver and passengers from XXX kg or

XXX lbs.

4) The resulting figure equals the available

amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs and there will

be five 150 lb passengers in your vehi-

cle, the amount of available cargo and

luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400

– 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5) Determine the combined weight of lug-

gage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and luggage

load capacity calculated in Step 4.

6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,

load from your trailer will be transferred

to your vehicle. Consult this manual to

determine how this reduces the avail-

able cargo and luggage load capacity of

your vehicle.

Vehicle Loading Example

As an example, suppose that the Tire and

Loading Information label on your vehicle

indicates that your vehicle’s total load

capacity is 950 lbs. If you were to drive

your vehicle with one passenger, and the

total combined weight of you and your pas-

senger was 350 lbs, then the cargo and

luggage capacity of your vehicle would be

600 lbs (950 – 350 = 600 lbs).

If you later added 2 more passengers, hav-

ing a combined weight of 325 lbs, the

cargo and luggage capacity of your vehicle

would be reduced from 600 lbs to 275 lbs

(600 – 325 = 275 lbs). As you can see, as

the number and combined weight of vehi-

cle occupants increase, the vehicle’s cargo

and luggage capacity decreases.

Suppose again, that you were to take a trip

in your vehicle with the same three pas-

sengers described above, and you decided

to tow a trailer having a trailer tongue

weight of 75 lbs. The cargo and luggage

capacity would be reduced again, to 200

lbs (275 – 75 = 200 lbs).

Determining Compatibility of Tire and

Vehicle Load Limits

The tires on your vehicle, when they are

inflated to the recommended tire inflation

pressure, have a load-carrying capacity

that is greater than the load that will be on

the tires when the vehicle is at its GVWR

or GAWR limit. Never use replacement

tires that have a load-carrying capacity

less than the original tires on your vehicle.

Tire load-carrying capacity information is

molded into the tire sidewall typically

shown as “Max. Load”. Use of replacement

tires with a lower load-carrying capacity

than the original tires, or failure to keep the

tires inflated to recommended tire pres-

sure, may reduce the GVWR or GAWR

limit of your vehicle.

NOTE:

Use of replacement tires with a higher

load-carrying capacity than the original

tires, or using a tire inflation pressure

higher than the recommended tire inflation

pressure, will not increase the GVWR or

GAWR limit of your vehicle.

Headlight Aiming:

Bulb Replacement: 7

9-35

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Battery

60A269

Your vehicle is equipped with a battery that

requires infrequent maintenance. You will

never have to add water. You should, how-

ever, periodically check the battery, battery

terminals and battery hold-down bracket

for corrosion. Remove corrosion using a

stiff brush and ammonia mixed with water,

or baking soda mixed with water. After

removing corrosion, rinse with clean water.

The test indicator on the top of the battery

provides information on the condition of

the battery.

If your vehicle is not going to be driven for

a month or longer, disconnect the cable

from the negative terminal of the battery to

help prevent discharge.

Fuses

Your vehicle has three types of fuses, as

described below:

Main Fuse – The main fuse takes current

directly from the battery.

Primary Fuses – These fuses are between

the main fuse and individual fuses, and are

for electrical load groups.

Individual Fuses – These fuses are for indi-

vidual electrical circuits.

For details on protected circuits, refer to

the “Fuses and Protected Circuits” section

in this manual.

WARNING

Batteries produce flammable hydro-

gen gas. Keep flames and sparks

away from the battery or an explosion

may occur. Never smoke when work-

ing near the battery.

WARNING

When checking or servicing the bat-

tery, disconnect the negative cable.

Be careful not to cause a short circuit

by allowing metal objects to contact

the battery posts and the vehicle at

the same time.

EXAMPLE

WARNING

To avoid harm to yourself or damage

to your vehicle or battery, follow the

jump starting instructions in the

“EMERGENCY SERVICE” section of

this manual if it is necessary to jump

start your vehicle.

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after han-

dling.

Bulb Replacement: 7

9-36

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Fuses in the Engine Compartment

80J051

80J052

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE

(1) 80A All electric load

(2) 50A Power window, Ignition,

Wiper, Starter

(3) 50A

Tail light, Rear defogger,

Door lock, Hazard/Horn,

Dome

(4) – Blank

(5) – Blank

(6) 15A Head light (Right) fuse

(7) 15A Head light (Left) fuse

(8) 20A Front fog light fuse

(9) – Blank

(10) 40A ABS control module fuse

(11) 30A Radiator fan fuse

(12) 30A ABS control module fuse

(13) 30A Starting motor fuse

(14) 50A Ignition switch fuse

(15) 30A Blower fan fuse

(16) 20A Air compressor fuse

(17) 15A Throttle motor fuse

(18) 15A Automatic transaxle fuse

(19) 15A Fuel injection fuse

(20) – Automatic transaxle relay

(21) – Air compressor relay

(22) – Fuel pump relay

(23) – Condenser fan relay

(24) – Front fog light relay

(25) – Throttle motor relay

(26) – FI MAIN

(27) – Starting motor relay

(28) – Radiator fan relay

(29) – Radiator fan relay 2

(30) – Radiator fan relay 3

Bulb Replacement: 7

9-37

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

60A243

Fuses under the Dash Board

79J093

SX4

80J053

WARNING

If the main fuse or a primary fuse

blows, be sure to have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized SUZUKI

dealer. Always use a genuine SUZUKI

replacement. Never use a substitute

such as a wire even for a temporary

fix, or extensive electrical damage

and a fire can result.

BLOWN

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(7)

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE

(1) 15A Rear wiper

(2) 15A Ignition coil

(3) 10A Back-up light

(4) 10A Meter

(5) 15A Accessory

(6) 15A Accessory 2

(7) 30A Power window

(8) 30A Wiper

(9) 10A IG1 SIG

(10) 15A Air bag

(11) 10A Anti-lock brake system

(12) 15A 4WD

(13) 15A Stop light

(14) 20A Door lock

(15) – Blank

(16) 10A ST SIG

(17) 15A Seat heater

(18) 10A IG 2 SIG

(19) 10A Tail light

(20) 15A Dome

Bulb Replacement: 7

9-38

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

SX4 SEDAN

80JC003 54G256

(1) Fuse puller

The fuses are also located under the

driver’s side of the dashboard. Remove the

fuse box lid by pulling it off. To remove a

fuse, use the fuse puller provided in the

fuse box. The amperage of each fuse is

shown on the top of the fuse box cover.

(21) 30A Rear defogger

(22) 15A Horn / Hazard

(23) 15A Audio

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

(21)

(24)

(14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (22) (23)

(7)

MAIN FUSE / PRIMARY FUSE

(1) 15A Rear wiper

(2) 15A Ignition coil

(3) 10A Back-up light

(4) 10A Meter

(5) 15A Accessory

(6) 15A Accessory 2

(7) 30A Power window

(8) 30A Wiper

(9) 10A IG1 SIG

(10) 15A Air bag

(11) 10A Anti-lock brake system

(12) – Blank

(13) 15A Stop light

(14) 20A Door lock

(15) – Blank

(16) 10A ST SIG

(17) 15A Seat heater

(18) 10A IG 2 SIG

(19) 10A Tail light

(20) 15A Dome

(21) 30A Rear defogger

(22) 15A Horn / Hazard

(23) 15A Audio

(24) 30A Rear defogger

EXAMPLE

Bulb Replacement: 7

9-39

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

65D046

NOTE:

Make sure that the fuse box always carries

spare fuses.

Headlight Aiming

Since special procedures are required, we

recommend you take your vehicle to your

SUZUKI dealer for headlight alignment.

Bulb Replacement

NOTE:

If it is difficult to replace headlight bulbs or

parking light bulbs due to under-hood com-

ponents trust this job to your dealer.

WARNING

Always be sure to replace a blown

fuse with a fuse of the correct amper-

age. Never use a substitute such as

aluminum foil or wire to replace a

blown fuse. If you replace a fuse and

the new one blows in a short period

of time, you may have a major electri-

cal problem. Have your vehicle

inspected immediately by your

SUZUKI dealer.

BLOWNOK

WARNING

• Light bulbs can be hot enough to

burn your finger right after being

turned off. This is true especially

for halogen headlight bulbs.

Replace the bulbs after they

become cool enough.

• The headlight bulbs are filled with

pressurized halogen gas. They can

burst and injure you if they are hit

or dropped. Handle them carefully.

CAUTION

The oils from your skin may cause a

halogen bulb to overheat and burst

when the lights are on. Grasp a new

bulb with a clean cloth.

CAUTION

Frequent replacement of a bulb indi-

cates the need for an inspection of

the electrical system. This should be

carried out by your SUZUKI dealer.

Wiper Blades: 3

9-40

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Center Interior Light (if equipped)

60G115

Pull down the lens by using a plain screw

driver covered with a soft cloth as shown.

To install it, simply push it back in.

The bulb can be removed by simply pulling

it out. When replacing the bulb, make sure

that the contact springs are holding the

bulb securely.

Headlights

65D149

54G121

Open the engine hood. Remove the cou-

pler and the rubber cover. Then unhook

the bulb holding spring and replace the

bulb.

Other General Lights

Bulb holder

54G123

(1) Removal

(2) Installation

To remove a bulb holder from a light hous-

ing, turn the holder counterclockwise and

pull it out. To install the holder, push the

holder in and turn it clockwise.

(1)

(2)

EXAMPLE

Wiper Blades: 3

9-41

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Bulb

54G124

(3) Removal

(4) Installation

There are two types of bulb, “Full glass

type” (1) and “Glass/metal type” (2).

To remove and install a full glass type bulb

(1), simply pull out or push in the bulb.

To remove a glass metal type bulb (2) from

a bulb holder, push in the bulb and turn it

counterclockwise. To install a new bulb,

push it in and turn it clockwise.

You can access the individual bulb or bulb

holders as follows.

Front parking light (1)

Front turn signal light (2)

79J012

Front fog light (if equipped)

SX4

80J006

SX4 SEDAN

55KS039

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

EXAMPLE

(1)

(2)

Wiper Blades: 3

9-42

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Rear combination light

(tail, stop, turn signal, etc.)

SX4

79J014

SX4 SEDAN

80JC046

Spot light

79J131

License plate light

SX4

75F087

SX4 SEDAN

56KN048

EXAMPLE

Wiper Blades: 3

Air Conditioning System: 4

9-43

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Luggage compartment light (SX4)

79J015

Trunk room light (SX4 SEDAN)

56KN004

High-mount stop light (if equipped)

SX4

80J100

To remove a high-mounted stop light hous-

ing the following procedure:

1) Open the tailgate, and remove the nuts

(1) as shown in the illustration.

63J127

2) Close the tailgate. Remove a high-

mounted stop light housing (2) from the

tailgate.

63J107

(1)

(2)

(3)(3) (4)

9-44

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

63J108

3) Pushing the unguiform prongs (3)

toward inside and remove the bulb

holder (4).

4) Replace the bulbs.

To install a high-mounted stop light

housing in the reverse order of removal.

SX4 SEDAN

80JC047

Wiper Blades

80G083

If the wiper blades become brittle or dam-

aged, or make streaks when wiping,

replace the wiper blades.

To install new wiper blades, follow the pro-

cedures below.

NOTE:

Some wiper blades may be different from

the ones described here depending on

vehicle specifications. If so, consult your

SUZUKI dealer for proper replacement

method.

CAUTION

To avoid scratching or breaking the

window, do not let the wiper arm

strike the window while replacing the

wiper blade.

9-45

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

For windshield wipers and some rear

wipers:

70G119

1) Hold the wiper arm away from the win-

dow.

NOTE:

When raising both of the front wiper arms,

pull the driver’s side wiper arm up first.

When returning the wiper arms, lower the

passenger’s side wiper arm first. Other-

wise, the wiper arms may interfere with

each other.

52D102

2) Squeeze lock lever (1) towards wiper

arm (2) and remove the wiper frame

from the arm as shown.

60A260

3) Pull the locked end of the wiper blade

firmly to unlock the blade and slide the

blade out as shown.

9-46

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

52D124

(3) Retainer

4) If the new blade is provided without the

two metal retainers, move them from

the old blade to the new one.

Installation

52D125

(4) Locked end

5) Install the new blade in the reverse

order of removal, with the locked end

positioned toward the wiper arm. Make

sure the blade is properly retained by

all the hooks. Grasp the blade near the

locked end and pull in the direction of

the arrows to lock the end into place.

6) Reinstall wiper frame to arm, making

sure that the lock lever is snapped

securely into the arm.

To remove some types of rear wiper

frame from the wiper arm:

1) Hold the arm away from the window.

80G146

2) Remove the wiper frame from the arm

as shown.

9-47

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

3) When reinstalling wiper frame to arm,

install the wiper frame in the reverse

order of removal.

To remove and install some types of

rear wiper blade from and to the wiper

frame.

Removal

52D104

1) Flex the locked end of blade (3) away

from retainer (4) to unlock it and slide

the blade out as shown.

Installation

60A265

2) Install the new blade in the reverse

order of removal. Make sure that the

blade is properly retained by all the

hooks and the end is locked in place.

To remove and install some types of

rear wiper blade from and to the wiper

frame.

65D151

1) Flex the ends of blade and frame, and

slide the blade out as shown.

But do not flex the frame end more than

necessary.

If you do, it can break off.

2) Install the new blade in the reverse

order of removal. Make sure that the

blade is properly retained by all the

hooks and both ends are in place.

9-48

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

Air Conditioning System

If you do not use the air conditioner for a

long period, such as during winter, it may

not give the best performance when you

start using it again. To help maintain opti-

mum performance and durability of your air

conditioner, it needs to be run periodically.

Operate the air conditioner at least once a

month for one minute with the engine

idling. This circulates the refrigerant and oil

and helps protect the internal components.

9-49

INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

80J21-03E

MEMO

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

60G411

EMERGENCY SERVICE

Jacking Instructions ........................................................... 10-1

Jump Starting Instructions ................................................ 10-3

Towing a Disabled Vehicle ................................................. 10-4

If the Starter Does Not Operate .......................................... 10-4

If the Engine is Flooded ...................................................... 10-5

If the Engine Overheats ...................................................... 10-5

If You Can Not Shift Automatic Transaxle Gearshift

Lever Out of “P” (PARK) .................................................... 10-6

10-1

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

Jacking Instructions

SX4

80JC014

SX4 SEDAN

80JC045

75F062

1) Place the vehicle on level, hard ground.

2) Set the parking brake firmly and shift

into “P” (Park) if your vehicle has an

automatic transaxle, or shift into “R”

(Reverse) if your vehicle has a manual

transaxle.

3) Turn on the hazard warning flasher if

your vehicle is near traffic.

4) Block the front and rear of the wheel

diagonally opposite of the wheel being

lifted.

5) Place the spare wheel near the wheel

being lifted as shown in the illustration

in case that the jack slips.

54G253

WARNING

• Be sure to shift into “P” (Park) for

an automatic transaxle vehicle, or

into “R” (Reverse) for a manual

transaxle vehicle when you jack up

the vehicle.

• Never jack up the vehicle with the

transaxle in “N” (Neutral). Other-

wise, an unstable jack may cause

an accident.

Jacking Instructions: 5

10-2

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

80J085

6) Position the jack at an angle as shown

in the illustration and raise the jack by

turning the jack handle clockwise until

the jack-head groove fits around the

jacking bar beneath the vehicle body.

7) Continue to raise the jack slowly and

smoothly until the tire clears the

ground. Do not raise the vehicle more

than necessary.

Front wheel

80J086

Rear wheel

80J087

front

WARNING

• Use the jack only to change wheels.

• Never jack up the vehicle on an

inclined surface.

• Never raise the vehicle with the

jack in a location other than the

specified jacking point (shown in

the illustration) near the wheel to

be changed.

• Make sure that the jack is raised at

least 51 mm (2 inches) before it

contacts the flange. Use of the jack

when it is within 51 mm (2 inches)

of being fully collapsed may result

in failure of the jack.

• Never get under the vehicle when it

is supported by the jack.

• Never run the engine when the

vehicle is supported by the jack

and never allow passengers to

remain in the vehicle.

Jacking Instructions: 5

10-3

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

Jump Starting Instructions

When jump starting your vehicle, use

the following procedure:

60A269

1) Use only a 12 volt battery to jump start

your vehicle. Position the good 12V bat-

tery close to your vehicle so that the

jumper cables will reach both batteries.

When using a battery installed on

another vehicle, DO NOT LET THE

VEHICLES TOUCH. Set the parking

brakes fully on both vehicles.

2) Turn off all vehicle accessories, except

those necessary for safety reasons (for

example, headlights or hazard lights).

54G079

3) Make jumper cable connections as fol-

lows:

1. Connect one end of the first jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of

the discharged battery (1).

2. Connect the other end to the positive

(+) terminal of the booster battery

(2).

3. Connect one end of the second

jumper cable to the negative (–) ter-

minal of the booster battery (2).

4. Make the final connection to an

unpainted, heavy metal part (i.e.

engine hook (3)) of the engine of the

vehicle with the discharged battery

(1).

WARNING

• Never attempt to jump start your

vehicle if the battery appears to be

frozen. Batteries in this condition

may explode or rupture if jump

starting is attempted.

• When making jumper cable con-

nections, be certain that your

hands and the jumper cables

remain clear from pulleys, belts or

fans.

• Batteries produce flammable

hydrogen gas. Keep flames and

sparks away from the battery or an

explosion may occur. Never smoke

when working near the battery.

• If the booster battery you use for

jump starting is installed in another

vehicle, make sure the two vehicles

are not touching each other.

• If your battery discharges repeat-

edly, for no apparent reason, have

your vehicle inspected by an autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer.

• To avoid harm to yourself or dam-

age to your vehicle or battery, fol-

low the jump starting instructions

below precisely and in order. If you

are in doubt, call for qualified road

service.

CAUTION

Your vehicle should not be started by

pushing or towing. This starting

method could result in permanent

damage to the catalytic converter.

Use jumper cables to start a vehicle

with a weak or run-down battery.

12V BATTERY (1)

(3)

(2)

EXAMPLE

Jacking Instructions: 5

10-4

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

4) If the booster battery you are using is

installed on another vehicle, start the

engine of the vehicle with the booster

battery. Run the engine at moderate

speed.

5) Start the engine of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

6) Remove the jumper cables in the exact

reverse order in which you connected

them.

Towing a Disabled Vehicle

Emergency Towing

If your vehicle is disabled, it may be towed

by a tow truck using one of the following

methods:

1) Tow the vehicle with two wheels lifted

by the tow truck and the other two

wheels on a towing dolly.

2) Use the appropriate towing method

specified for your vehicle in the “Towing

Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-

tion, but with the wheels lifted by the

tow truck instead of on a towing dolly.

Be sure to carefully follow the specific

instructions provided in the “Towing

Your Vehicle (recreational towing)” sec-

tion.

If the Starter Does Not

Operate

1) Try turning the ignition switch to the

“START” position with the headlights

turned on to determine the battery con-

dition. If the headlights go excessively

dim or go off, it usually means that

either the battery has run down or bat-

tery terminal contact is poor. Recharge

the battery or correct battery terminal

contact if necessary.

2) If the headlights remain bright, check

the fuses. If the reason for failure of the

starter is not obvious, there may be a

major electrical problem. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by your authorized

SUZUKI dealer.

WARNING

Never connect the jumper cable

directly to the negative (–) terminal of

the discharged battery, or an explo-

sion may occur.

CAUTION

If vehicle damage (such as steering

or drivetrain damage, etc.) prevents

normal use of the towing procedures

for your vehicle described in the

“Towing Your Vehicle (recreational

towing)” section, have your vehicle

towed with two wheels lifted by the

tow truck and the other two wheels

on a towing dolly.

Jacking Instructions: 5

Jump Starting Instructions: 7

10-5

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

If the Engine is Flooded

If the engine is flooded with gasoline, it

may be hard to start. If this happens, press

the accelerator pedal all the way to the

floor and hold it there while cranking the

engine. (Do not operate the starter motor

for more than 15 seconds).

If the Engine Overheats

The engine could overheat temporarily

under severe driving conditions. If the High

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning

Light in the instrument cluster glows red

during driving:

1) Turn off the air conditioner, if equipped.

2) Take the vehicle to a safe place and

park.

3) Let the engine run at the normal idle

speed for a few minutes until the engine

is cooled down to the normal tempera-

ture.

You can determine the engine tempera-

ture is normal by either condition below:

– Both High Engine Coolant Tempera-

ture Warning Light and Low Engine

Coolant Temperature Light have gone

off.

– Low Engine Coolant Temperature

Light is lit in blue, and High Engine

Coolant Temperature Warning Light

has gone off.

See “High Engine Coolant Temperature

Warning Light” and “Low Engine Coolant

Temperature Light” in the INDEX for further

information.

WARNING

If you see or hear escaping steam,

stop the vehicle in a safe place and

immediately turn off the engine to let

it cool. Do not open the hood when

steam is present. When the steam

can no longer be seen or heard, open

the hood to see if the coolant is still

boiling. If it is, you must wait until it

stops boiling before you proceed.

Also, be careful not to touch hot

engine parts (radiator, water hoses,

engine etc.).

Jump Starting Instructions: 7

Towing a Disabled Vehicle: 6

10-6

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

If the temperature indication does not

return to the normal condition:

1) Turn off the engine and check that the

water pump belt and pulleys are not

damaged or slipping. If any abnormality

is found, correct it.

2) Check the coolant level in the reservoir.

If it is found to be lower than the “LOW”

line, look for leaks at the radiator, water

pump and radiator and heater hoses. If

you locate any leaks that may have

caused the overheating, do not run the

engine until these problems have been

corrected.

3) If you do not find a leak, carefully add

coolant to the reservoir and then the

radiator, if necessary. (Refer to “Engine

Coolant” in the “INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE” section.)

65D614

If You Can Not Shift

Automatic Transaxle

Gearshift Lever Out of “P”

(PARK)

62J083

Vehicles with an automatic transaxle have

an electrically operated park-lock feature.

If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, or

there is some other electrical failure, the

automatic transaxle cannot be shifted out

of Park in the normal way. Jump starting

may correct the condition. If not, follow the

procedure described below. This proce-

dure will permit changing the transaxle out

of Park.

1) Be sure the parking brake is firmly

applied.

2) If the engine is running, stop the

engine.

WARNING

• It is hazardous to remove the radia-

tor cap when the water temperature

is high, because scalding fluid and

steam may be blown out under

pressure. The cap should only be

taken off when the coolant temper-

ature has lowered.

• To prevent personal injury, keep

hands, tools and clothing away

from the engine cooling fan and air-

conditioner fan (if equipped). These

electric fans can automatically turn

on without warning.

(1)

If the Starter Does Not Operate: 2, 9

If the Engine is Flooded: 2, 9

If the Engine Overheats: 2, 9

10-7

EMERGENCY SERVICE

80J21-03E

3) Make sure the key is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position.

4) Remove the cover (1) over the button.

5) With pushing the release button by the

key or the flat end rod, shift the gear-

shift lever to the desired position.

This procedure is for emergency use only.

If repeated use of this procedure is neces-

sary, or the procedure does not work as

described, take the vehicle to your dealer

for repair.

If the Engine Overheats: 2, 9

APPEARANCE CARE

80J21-03E

60G412

APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion Prevention ......................................................... 11-1

Vehicle Cleaning ................................................................. 11-3

11-1

APPEARANCE CARE

80J21-03E

Corrosion Prevention

It is important to take good care of your

vehicle to protect it from corrosion.

Listed below are instructions for how to

maintain your vehicle to prevent corrosion.

Please read and follow these instructions

carefully.

Important Information About

Corrosion

Common causes of corrosion

1) Accumulation of road salt, dirt, moisture

or chemicals in hard to reach areas of

the vehicle underbody or frame.

2) Chipping, scratches and any damage to

treated or painted metal surfaces

resulting from minor accidents or

impact from stones and gravel.

Environmental conditions which accel-

erate corrosion

1) Road salt, dust control chemicals, sea

air or industrial pollution will all acceler-

ate the corrosion of metal.

2) High humidity will increase the rate of

corrosion particularly when the temper-

ature range is just above the freezing

point.

3) Moisture in certain areas of a vehicle

for an extended period of time may pro-

mote corrosion even though other body

sections may be completely dry.

4) High temperatures will cause an accel-

erated rate of corrosion to parts of the

vehicle which are not well ventilated to

permit quick drying.

52D151

This information illustrates the necessity of

keeping your vehicle (particularly the

underbody) as clean and dry as possible. It

is equally important to repair any damage

to the paint or protective coatings as soon

as possible.

How to Help Prevent Corrosion

Wash your vehicle frequently

The best way to preserve the finish on your

vehicle and to help avoid corrosion is to

keep it clean with frequent washing.

Wash your vehicle at least once during the

winter and once immediately after the win-

ter. Keep your vehicle, particularly the

underside, as clean and dry as possible.

If you frequently drive on salted roads, your

vehicle should be washed at least once a

month during the winter. If you live near the

ocean, your vehicle should be washed at

least once a month throughout the year.

For washing instructions, refer to the “Vehi-

cle Cleaning” section.

Remove foreign material deposits

Foreign material such as salts, chemicals,

road oil or tar, tree sap, bird droppings and

industrial fall-out may damage the finish of

your vehicle if it is left on painted surfaces.

Remove these types of deposits as quickly

as possible. If these deposits are difficult to

wash off, an additional cleaner may be

required. Be sure that any cleaner you use

is not harmful to painted surfaces and is

specifically intended for your purposes.

Follow the manufacturer’s directions when

using these special cleaners.

Repair finish damage

Carefully examine your vehicle for damage

to the painted surfaces, especially if it is

used off-road. Should you find any chips or

scratches in the paint, touch them up

immediately to prevent corrosion from

starting. If the chips or scratches have

gone through to the bare metal, have a

qualified body shop make the repair.

Corrosion Prevention:

11-2

APPEARANCE CARE

80J21-03E

Keep passenger and cargo compart-

ments clean

Moisture, dirt or mud can accumulate

under the floor mats and may cause corro-

sion. Occasionally, check under these

mats to ensure that this area is clean and

dry. More frequent checks are necessary if

the vehicle is used off road or in wet

weather.

Certain cargo such as chemicals, fertiliz-

ers, cleaners, salts, etc. are extremely cor-

rosive by nature. These products should

be transported in sealed containers. If a

spill or leak does occur, clean and dry the

area immediately.

Use the body trim

The use of the body trim will help protect

your vehicle, especially if you frequently

drive on gravel or salted roads. The fittings

for such guards should also be corrosion

resistant. Please check with your autho-

rized SUZUKI dealer for information on

these guards.

Store your vehicle in a dry, well-venti-

lated area

Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly

ventilated area. If you often wash your

vehicle in the garage or if you frequently

drive it in when wet, your garage may be

damp. The high humidity in the garage

may cause or accelerate corrosion. A wet

vehicle may corrode even in a heated

garage if the ventilation is poor.

Cover your vehicle

50G203

If you can not regularly park your vehicle in

a garage, we recommend you use a vehi-

cle cover. Years of exposure to midday sun

can cause the colors in paint, plastic parts

and fabrics to fade. Covering your vehicle

with a high-quality, “breathable” vehicle

cover can help protect the finish from the

harmful UV rays in sunlight, and can

reduce the amount of dust and air pollution

reaching the surface. Your SUZUKI dealer

can help you select the right cover for your

vehicle.

WARNING

Do not apply additional undercoating

or rust preventive coating on or

around exhaust system components

such as the catalytic converter,

exhaust pipes, etc. A fire could be

started if the undercoating substance

becomes overheated.

Corrosion Prevention:

11-3

APPEARANCE CARE

80J21-03E

Vehicle Cleaning

76G044S

Cleaning Interior

Vinyl upholstery

Prepare a solution of soap or mild deter-

gent mixed with warm water. Apply the

solution to the vinyl with a sponge or soft

cloth and let it soak for a few minutes to

loosen dirt. Rub the surface with a clean,

damp cloth to remove dirt and the soap

solution. If some dirt still remains on the

surface, repeat this procedure.

Fabric upholstery

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

Using a mild soap solution, rub stained

areas with a clean damp cloth. To remove

soap, rub the areas again with a cloth

dampened with water. Repeat this until the

stain is removed, or use a commercial fab-

ric cleaner for tougher stains. If you use a

fabric cleaner, carefully follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions and precautions.

Leather upholstery

Remove loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.

Using a mild soap or saddle soap solution,

wipe dirt off with a clean damp soft cloth.

To remove soap, wipe the areas again with

a soft cloth dampened with water. Wipe the

areas dry with a soft dry cloth. Repeat this

until the dirt or stain is removed, or use a

commercial leather cleaner for tougher dirt

or stains. If you use a leather cleaner, care-

fully follow the manufacture’s instructions

and precautions. Do not use solvent type

cleaners or abrasive cleaners.

Seat belts

Clean seat belts with a mild soap and

water. Do not use bleach or dye on the

belts. They may weaken the fabric in the

belts.

Vinyl floor mats

Ordinary dirt can be removed from vinyl

with water or mild soap. Use a brush to

help loosen dirt. After dirt is loosened,

rinse the mat thoroughly with water and

dry it in the shade.

Carpets

Remove dirt and soil as much as possible

with a vacuum cleaner. Using a mild soap

solution, rub stained areas with a clean

damp cloth. To remove soap, rub the areas

again with a cloth dampened with water.

Repeat this until the stain is removed, or

use a commercial carpet cleaner for

tougher stains. If you use a carpet cleaner,

carefully follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and precautions.

Cleaning the Exterior

WARNING

When cleaning the interior or exterior

of the vehicle, NEVER USE flammable

solvents such lacquer thinners, gas-

oline, benzene or cleaning materials

such as bleaches and strong house-

hold detergents. The materials could

cause personal injury or damage to

the vehicle.

CAUTION

It is important that your vehicle be

kept clean and free from dirt. Failure

to keep your vehicle clean may result

in fading of the paint or corrosion to

various parts of the vehicle body.

Vehicle Cleaning:

11-4

APPEARANCE CARE

80J21-03E

Washing

When washing the vehicle, follow the

instructions below:

1) Flush the underside of body and wheel

housings with pressurized water to

remove mud and debris. Use plenty of

water.

2) Rinse the body to loosen the dirt.

Remove dirt and mud from the body

exterior with running water. You may

use a soft sponge or brush. Do not use

hard materials which can scratch the

paint or plastic. Remember that the

headlight covers or lenses are made of

plastic in many cases.

3) Wash the entire exterior with a mild

detergent or car wash soap using a

sponge or soft cloth. The sponge or

cloth should be frequently soaked in the

soap solution.

4) Once the dirt has been completely

removed, rinse off the detergent with

running water.

5) After rinsing, wipe off the vehicle body

with a wet chamois or cloth and allow it

to dry in the shade.

6) Check carefully for damage to painted

surfaces. If there is any damage,

“touch-up” the damage following the

procedure below:

1. Clean all damaged spots and allow

them to dry.

2. Stir the paint and “touch-up” the

damaged spots lightly using a small

brush.

3. Allow the paint to dry completely.

WARNING

• Never attempt to wash and wax

your vehicle with the engine run-

ning.

• When cleaning the underside of the

body and fender, where there may

be sharp-edged parts, you should

wear gloves and a long-sleeved

shirt to protect your hands and

arms from being cut.

• After washing your vehicle, care-

fully test the brakes before driving

to make sure they have maintained

their normal effectiveness.

CAUTION

• When washing the vehicle, avoid

directing steam or hot water of

more than 80°C (176°F) on plastic

parts.

• To avoid damaging engine compo-

nents, do not use pressurized

water in the engine compartment.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the paint or plas-

tic surface, do not wipe the dirt off

without ample water. Be sure to fol-

low above procedure.

CAUTION

When using a commercial car wash

product, observe the cautions speci-

fied by the manufacturer. Never use

strong household detergents or

soaps.

CAUTION

If you use an automatic car wash,

make sure that your vehicle’s body

parts, such as spoilers, can not be

damaged. If you are in doubt, consult

the car wash operator for advice.

Vehicle Cleaning:

11-5

APPEARANCE CARE

80J21-03E

Waxing

60B211S

After washing the vehicle, waxing and pol-

ishing are recommended to further protect

and beautify the paint.

• Only use waxes and polishes of good

quality.

• When using waxes and polishes,

observe the precautions specified by the

manufacturers.

Vehicle Cleaning:

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J21-03E

54G072

GENERAL INFORMATION

Identification Numbers ....................................................... 12-1

Safety Certification Label ................................................... 12-2

Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 12-2

Warranties ............................................................................ 12-2

On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data

Recorders ............................................................................ 12-3

Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 12-4

12-1

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J21-03E

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number

60G152

79J019

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

may be found in the location shown in the

above illustrations. This number is used to

your dealer when ordering parts or refer-

ring to special service information.

Engine Serial Number

60G128

The engine serial number is stamped on

the cylinder block as shown in the above

illustration.

EXAMPLE (for some vehicles)

Identification Numbers: 2, 5

12-2

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J21-03E

Safety Certification Label

52D059

This label contains important safety-

related information about your vehicle. The

label is located on the driver’s door lock pil-

lar.

Emission Compliance Label

(for U.S.A.)

60A412

The EPA emission compliance label is

located under the hood.

Warranties

The warranties covering your vehicle are

explained in a separate New Vehicle War-

ranty Information booklet given to you at

the time of sale. Please read this booklet

carefully so you can understand your rights

and responsibilities.

For U.S.A.

The following warranties are provided with

your vehicle:

• New Vehicle Limited Warranty

• Limited Warranty For SUZUKI Parts or

Accessories

• Emission Components Defect Warranty

• Emission Performance Warranty

Safety Certification Label: 6

Emission Compliance Label (For U.S.A.): 1, 2

Warranties: NO

12-3

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J21-03E

On-Board Vehicle Computers

and Event Data Recorders

Your vehicle is equipped with on-board

computer systems which monitor and

control several aspects of vehicle per-

formance, including the following:

• Emission-related components and

engine parameters such as engine

speed and throttle position are moni-

tored to provide emissions control

and to provide optimum fuel econ-

omy. Your vehicle also has an on-

board diagnostic system which mon-

itors and records information about

emission-related malfunctions.

• Signals from various sensors are

monitored to provide air bag deploy-

ment.

• If your vehicle is equipped with

antilock brakes, conditions such as

vehicle speed and brake perfor-

mance are monitored, so that the

ABS system can provide effective

antilock braking. If your vehicle has

an Electronic Stability Program

(ESP®) system, conditions such as

yaw rate, lateral acceleration, and

brake fluid pressure are monitored,

so that the ESP® system can help

the driver control the vehicle in diffi-

cult driving situations.

Some information may be stored by

the on-board computers during normal

operation of the vehicle. This stored

information can assist technicians in

repairing the vehicle when malfunc-

tions occur. Other information is stored

only in the event of crash, by computer

systems that are commonly called

Event Data Recorders (EDRs).

In a crash event, EDRs such as the

Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Mod-

ule (SDM) in your vehicle may record

information about the condition of the

vehicle and how it was operated, such

as data related to airbag readiness,

airbag performance, safety belt usage,

and the severity of the collision. These

data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur and lead to

the designing of safer vehicles. The

SDM in your vehicle does not collect

or store personal information.

To read the stored information, special

equipment is needed and access to

the vehicle or storage device is

required. SUZUKI will not access infor-

mation about a crash event or share it

with others other than with the consent

of the vehicle owner or lessee, in

response to an official request from

the police or similar government office,

as part of SUZUKI’s defense of litiga-

tion through the discovery process, or

as required by law.

In addition, once SUZUKI collects or

receives data, SUZUKI may use the

data for research conducted by

SUZUKI, make the data available for

outside research if need is shown and

confidentiality is assured, or make

summary data which does not identify

specific vehicles available for outside

research.

Others, such as law enforcement per-

sonnel, may have access to the spe-

cial equipment that can read the

information if they have access to the

vehicle or storage device.

Reporting Safety Defects: NO

12-4

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J21-03E

Reporting Safety Defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the

National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) in addition to

notifying American Suzuki Motor Corp.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall

and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you, your

dealer, or American Suzuki Motor

Corp.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-

888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Sev-

enth Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other infor-

mation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

To contact American Suzuki, owners

in the continental United States can

call toll-free 1-800-934-0934, or write

to:

American Suzuki Motor Corporation

Automotive Customer Relations

3251 East Imperial Highway

Brea, CA 92821-6795

For owners outside the continental

United States, please refer to the dis-

tributor’s address listed in your War-

ranty Information booklet.

For vehicles registered for use and

principally operated in Canada please

contact Suzuki Canada Inc. at 1-905-

889-2677 extension 2254 or write to:

Suzuki Canada Inc.

Customer Relations

100 East Beaver Creek Road

Richmond Hill, On

L4B 1J6

12-5

GENERAL INFORMATION

80J21-03E

MEMO

13-1

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J101

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) PROTECTED CIRCUIT

In engine

compartment

MAIN

FUSE

BOX

(1) BLACK (80) All electric load

(2) RED (50) Power window, Ignition, Wiper, Starter

(3) RED (50) Tail light, Rear defogger, Door lock, Hazard/Horn, Dome

(4) – Blank

(5) – Blank

(6) BLUE (15) Head light (Right) fuse

(7) BLUE (15) Head light (Left) fuse

(8) YELLOW (20) Front fog light fuse

(9) – Blank

(10) GREEN (40) ABS control module fuse

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)

Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7

13-2

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

80J101

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) PROTECTED CIRCUIT

In engine

compartment

MAIN

FUSE

BOX

(11) PINK (30) Radiator fan fuse

(12) PINK (30) ABS control module fuse

(13) PINK (30) Starting motor fuse

(14) RED (50) Ignition switch fuse

(15) PINK (30) Blower fan fuse

(16) YELLOW (20) Air compressor fuse

(17) BLUE (15) Throttle motor fuse

(18) BLUE (15) Automatic transaxle fuse

(19) BLUE (15) Fuel injection fuse

(20) – Automatic transaxle relay

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)

Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7

13-3

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

80J101

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) PROTECTED CIRCUIT

In engine

compartment

MAIN

FUSE

BOX

(21) – Air compressor relay

(22) – Fuel pump relay

(23) – Condensor fan relay

(24) – Front fog light relay

(25) – Throttle motor relay

(26) – FI MAIN

(27) – Starting motor relay

(28) – Radiator fan relay

(29) – Radiator fan relay 2

(30) – Radiator fan relay 3

(1)

(2) (3)

(28)

(27)(26)(25)

(6) (7) (9) (11)

(15) (16) (17) (18) (19)

(24)

(8)(4) (5) (10)

(22)(21)

(23)

(20)

(12) (13) (14)

(30)

(29)

Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7

13-4

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

SX4

80J053

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT

Under the

dashboard

FUSE

BOX

(1) BLUE (15) RR WIP Rear wiper

(2) BLUE (15) IG COIL Ignition coil

(3) RED (10) BACK Back-up light

(4) RED (10) MTR Meter

(5) BLUE (15) ACC Accessory

(6) BLUE (15) ACC2 Accessory 2

(7) PINK (30) P/W Power window

(8) GREEN (30) WIP Wiper

(9) RED (10) IG1 SIG IG1 SIG

(10) BLUE (15) A/B Air bag

(11) RED (10) ABS Anti-lock brake system

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(7)

Fuses and Protected Circuits: 7

13-5

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

80J053

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT

Under the

dashboard

FUSE

BOX

(12) BLUE (15) 4WD 4WD

(13) BLUE (15) STOP Stop light

(14) YELLOW (20) D/L Door lock

(15) – – Blank

(16) RED (10) ST SIG ST SIG

(17) BLUE (15) S/H Seat heater

(18) RED (10) IG2 SIG IG2 SIG

(19) RED (10) TAIL Tail light

(20) BLUE (15) DOME Dome

(21) GREEN (30) RR DEF Rear defogger

(22) BLUE (15) HORN HAZ Horn/Hazard

(23) BLUE (15) AUDIO Audio

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)

(7)

13-6

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

SX4 SEDAN

80JC003

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT

Under the

dashboard

FUSE

BOX

(1) BLUE (15) RR WIP Rear wiper

(2) BLUE (15) IG COIL Ignition coil

(3) RED (10) BACK Back-up light

(4) RED (10) MTR Meter

(5) BLUE (15) ACC Accessory

(6) BLUE (15) ACC2 Accessory 2

(7) PINK (30) P/W Power window

(8) GREEN (30) WIP Wiper

(9) RED (10) IG1 SIG IG1 SIG

(10) BLUE (15) A/B Air bag

(11) RED (10) ABS Anti-lock brake system

(12) – – Blank

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

(21)

(24)

(14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (22) (23)

(7)

13-7

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

80JC003

COLOR/SIZE (AMPS) FUSE NAME PROTECTED CIRCUIT

Under the

dashboard

FUSE

BOX

(13) BLUE (15) STOP Stop light

(14) YELLOW (20) D/L Door lock

(15) – – Blank

(16) RED (10) ST SIG ST SIG

(17) BLUE (15) S/H Seat heater

(18) RED (10) IG2 SIG IG2 SIG

(19) RED (10) TAIL Tail light

(20) BLUE (15) DOME Dome

(21) GREEN (30) RR DEF Rear defogger

(22) BLUE (15) HORN HAZ Horn/Hazard

(23) BLUE (15) AUDIO Audio

(24) GREEN (30) RR DEF Rear defogger

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)

(21)

(24)

(14) (15) (16)

(18)(17) (19) (20) (22) (23)

(7)

13-8

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS

80J21-03E

MEMO

14-1

SPECIFICATIONS

80J21-03E

SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE:

Specifications are subject to change with-

out notice.

M/T: Manual transaxle

A/T: Automatic transaxle

2WD: 2-wheel drive

i-AWD: intelligent All Wheel Drive

ITEM: Dimensions UNIT: mm (in.) SX4 SX4 SEDAN

Overall length 4115 – 4135 (162.0 – 162.8) 4490 – 4510 (176.8 – 177.6)

Overall width 1730 – 1755 (68.1 – 69.1) 1730 (68.1)

Overall height 2WD 195 tire 1575 (62.0) 1545 (60.8)

2WD/i-AWD 205 tire 1605 (63.2) 1545 (60.8)

Wheelbase 2500 (98.4) I

Tr a c k front 2WD 1500 (59.1) I

i-AWD 1500 (59.1) –

rear 1495 (58.9) I

Ground clearance 195 tire 165 (6.5) I

205 tire 175 (6.9) 160 (6.3)

ITEM: Weight

Gross axle weight rating

See the safety certification label and the tire information label which

are located on the driver’s door lock pillar.

Gross vehicle weight rating

Vehicle capacity weight

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

14-2

SPECIFICATIONS

80J21-03E

ITEM: Engine

Type J20A (16V DOHC)

Number of cylinders 4

Bore 84.0 mm (3.31 in.)

Stroke 90.0 mm (3.54 in.)

Piston displacement 1995 cm3 (1995cc, 121.7 cu.in)

Compression ratio 10.5 : 1

ITEM: Electrical

Ignition timing 3° – 17° B.T.D.C. at idle speed

Standard spark plug NGK IFR5J11

Battery GP24 12V

Fuses See “INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” and “FUSES AND PRO-

TECTED CIRCUITS” sections.

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

14-3

SPECIFICATIONS

80J21-03E

ITEM: Light WATTAGE BULB No.

Headlight 12V 65/55W HB5

Front fog light 12V 55W H11

Front turn signal light 12V 21W WY21W

Rear turn signal light 12V 21W WY21W

Parking light 12V 5W W5W

Brake/tail light 12V 21/5W W21/5W

License plate light 12V 5W W5W

Reversing light 12V 21W W21W

Dome light 12V 10W –

Luggage compartment light 12V 5W –

Spot light 12V 8W –

High mount stop light SX4 12V 5W W5W

SX4 SEDAN 12V18W W16W

Side marker light 12V 5W W5W

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

14-4

SPECIFICATIONS

80J21-03E

ITEM: Wheel

Tire size, front and rear SX4 P195/65R15, P205/60R16

SX4 SEDAN P195/65R15, P205/50R17

Tire pressure For the specified tire pressure, see the Tire Information Label located

on the driver’s door lock pillar.

ITEM: Steering

Toe IN 1.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.0393 ± 0.0393 in.)

Camber angle P195/65R15, P205/60R16, P195/65R15 –0° 10’ ± 1°

P205/50R17 –0° 17’ ± 1°

Caster angle P195/65R15, P205/60R16, P195/65R15 3° 40’ ± 2°

P205/50R17 3° 46’ ± 2°

ITEM: Capacities

Coolant (including reserve tank) M/T 7.0 L (14.8 US pt)

A/T 7.5 L (15.8 US pt)

Fuel tank 2WD 50 L (13.2 US gal)

i-AWD 45 L (11.9 US gal)

Engine oil (replaced with filter) 4.5 L (4.7 quarts)

Transaxle oil Manual transaxle: 2.5 L (5.3 US pt)

4-speed automatic transaxle: 7.3 L (15.4 US pt)

Rear differential oil 0.8 L (1.7 US pt)

Transfer gear box oil 0.6 L (1.2 US pt)

Specifications: 1, 2, 5, 6, 7, 10, 11

15-1

INDEX

80J21-03E

INDEX

Symbols

“CRUISE” Indicator Light...................................................... 4-8

“ESP OFF” Indicator Light........................................... 4-6, 6-14

“ESP OFF” Switch ............................................................... 4-13

“ESP” (Electronic Stability Program) Warning Light ......... 4-5

“ESP” Warning Light........................................................... 6-13

“PASS AIRBAG OFF” Indicator.......................................... 4-20

“SET” Indicator Light ............................................................ 4-8

Numerics

2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive) Switch............... 4-14

4-Speed Automatic Transaxle .............................................. 6-5

A/T Selector Position Indicator .......................................... 4-10

Accelerator Pedal .................................................................. 5-2

Accessory Socket................................................................ 5-11

Adding Coolant.................................................................... 9-18

Adjusting Seat Position ...................................................... 2-20

Adjusting Seatbacks ........................................................... 2-20

AIR BAG Light........................................................................ 4-7

Air Cleaner............................................................................ 9-19

Air Conditioning System..................................................... 9-48

All Seat Belts........................................................................ 2-25

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......................................... 6-10

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light ................... 4-5

Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) ....................................... 6-12

Assist Grips............................................................................ 5-9

Audio Systems..................................................................... 4-32

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning System

(Climate Control).................................................................. 4-28

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...................................2-24

Automatic Transaxle Fluid ..................................................9-16

Basic Operations..................................................................4-35

Battery...................................................................................9-35

Brake Assist System............................................................6-10

Brake Fluid............................................................................9-21

Brake Pedal....................................................................5-2, 9-22

Brake System Warning Light ................................................4-4

Brakes ...................................................................................9-21

Braking....................................................................................6-9

Break-In.................................................................................6-18

Bulb Replacement................................................................9-39

Catalytic Converter ..............................................................6-19

Changing Engine Oil and Filter...........................................9-12

Changing Wheels.................................................................9-31

Charging Light........................................................................4-6

Child Lock System (rear doors)..........................................2-13

Child Restraint Systems......................................................2-29

Cigarette Lighter and Ashtray............................................. 4-16

Clock .....................................................................................4-17

Clutch Pedal .................................................................. 5-2, 9-24

Compact Spare Tire .............................................................9-30

Coolant Level Check............................................................9-18

Coolant Replacement ..........................................................9-18

Corrosion Prevention ..........................................................11-1

Cruise Control ........................................................................3-9

Cup Holder and Storage Area .............................................5-11

Daily Inspection Checklist..................................................... 6-1

15-2

INDEX

80J21-03E

Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) Indicator Light................ 4-10

Daytime Running Light (D.R.L.) System.............................. 3-5

Door Locks ............................................................................. 2-1

Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light........................................ 4-6

Driving on Hills ...................................................................... 7-1

Driving on Slippery Roads.................................................... 7-2

Electric Power Steering Light............................................... 4-8

Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) ................................. 6-12

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ................................. 2-24

Emission Compliance Label (for U.S.A.) ........................... 12-2

Engine Block Heater.............................................................. 6-4

Engine Coolant .................................................................... 9-17

Engine Hood......................................................................... 5-10

Engine Oil and Filter............................................................ 9-11

Engine Serial Number ......................................................... 12-1

Exhaust Gas Warning............................................................ 6-1

Eyeglasses Holder............................................................... 5-10

Fluid Level Check ................................................................ 9-16

Fog Light Switch.................................................................. 4-16

Folding Rear Seats ................................................................ 5-4

Frame Hooks ........................................................................ 5-12

Front Air Bags...................................................................... 2-42

Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light.................... 4-19

Fuel Consumption and Driving Range .............................. 4-17

Fuel Filler Cap........................................................................ 5-3

Fuel Gauge ........................................................................... 4-12

Fuel Pump Labeling............................................................... 1-1

Fuel Recommendation .......................................................... 1-1

Fuses .................................................................................... 9-35

FUSES AND PROTECTED CIRCUITS .................................13-1

Fuses in the Engine Compartment.....................................9-36

Fuses under the Dash Board ..............................................9-37

Gasoline Containing MTBE ...................................................1-1

Gasoline/Ethanol blends .......................................................1-1

Gasoline/Methanol blends.....................................................1-1

Gear Oil .................................................................................9-14

Gear Oil Level Check ...........................................................9-15

Gear Oil Replacement..........................................................9-15

Gearshift Lever.......................................................................5-2

GLOSSARY OF TIRE TERMINOLOGY ................................9-32

Glove Box .............................................................................4-20

Hazard Warning Switch .......................................................4-13

Head Restraints....................................................................2-20

Headlight Aiming..................................................................9-39

Heated Rear Window and Heated Outside Rearview

Mirrors Switch ......................................................................4-15

Heating and Air Conditioning System................................4-21

Heating System ....................................................................4-22

High Beam Indicator Light ....................................................4-9

Highway Driving.....................................................................7-1

Horn.......................................................................................3-11

How the ABS Works.............................................................6-11

Identification Numbers ........................................................12-1

If the Engine is Flooded.......................................................10-5

If the Engine Overheats .......................................................10-5

If the Starter Does Not Operate...........................................10-4

15-3

INDEX

80J21-03E

If You Can Not Shift Automatic Transaxle Gearshift

Lever Out of “P” (PARK) ..................................................... 10-6

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck .................................................... 7-2

Ignition Key Reminder........................................................... 2-1

Ignition Switch ....................................................................... 3-1

Improving Fuel Economy.................................................... 6-20

Information Display ............................................................. 4-17

Inside Rearview Mirror ........................................................ 2-18

Installation of Child Restraint with Top Strap................... 2-37

Installation with Lap-Shoulder Seat Belts

(child restraint with no top strap)....................................... 2-31

Installation with the LATCH System .................................. 2-34

Instrument Cluster................................................................. 4-2

Instrument Light Brightness Control................................. 4-14

Instrument Panel.................................................................... 4-1

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) AUTO Indicator

Light ........................................................................................ 4-9

intelligent All Wheel Drive (i-AWD) LOCK Indicator

Light ........................................................................................ 4-9

Interior Light Switch .............................................................. 5-8

Jacking Instructions............................................................ 10-1

Jump Starting Instructions ................................................. 10-3

Keyless Entry System Transmitter .................................... 2-10

Keyless Start System Indicator Light .................................. 4-8

Keyless Start System Remote Controller............................ 2-3

Keys ........................................................................................ 2-1

Lap-Shoulder Belt................................................................ 2-24

Lighting Operation................................................................. 3-5

Lighting/Turn Signal Control Lever......................................3-5

Lights “On” reminder ............................................................3-5

Listening to a CD..................................................................4-39

Listening to a CD from an External CD Changer

(Option) .................................................................................4-50

Listening to a XM Satellite Radio (Option).........................4-47

Listening to Audio for AUX (Option) ..................................4-49

Listening to the Radio .........................................................4-37

Low Fuel Warning Light ........................................................4-8

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light................................4-3, 6-15

Luggage Compartment Cover............................................. 5-14

Luggage Compartment Light ..............................................5-15

Maintenance Recommended under Severe Driving

Conditions .............................................................................. 9-7

Maintenance Schedule .......................................................... 9-2

Malfunction Indicator Light ...................................................4-7

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System ..................4-25

Manual Transaxle...................................................................6-6

Mirrors...................................................................................2-18

Odometer ..............................................................................4-11

Oil Level Check ....................................................................9-11

Oil Pressure Light .................................................................. 4-6

On-Board Vehicle Computers and Event Data

Recorders .............................................................................12-3

Open Door Warning Light .....................................................4-8

Outside Rearview Mirrors....................................................2-19

Parking Brake Lever .....................................................5-1, 9-23

Pedals......................................................................................5-1

15-4

INDEX

80J21-03E

Periodic Maintenance Schedule........................................... 9-3

Power Assisted Brakes ......................................................... 6-9

Power Door Locking System ................................................ 2-2

Power Mirror Control........................................................... 2-19

Power Steering..................................................................... 9-23

Power Steering Fluid ........................................................... 9-23

Power Window Controls ..................................................... 2-16

Radio Antenna ............................................................ 4-38, 5-16

Rear Window Wiper/Washer Switch .................................... 3-8

Refill with Oil and Check for Leaks.................................... 9-13

Refilling................................................................................. 9-12

Remote Audio Controls.............................................. 3-11, 4-53

Replace the Oil Filter ........................................................... 9-13

Replacing Tires and/or Wheels .......................................... 6-18

Reporting Safety Defects .................................................... 12-4

Roof Rails or Roof Rack Anchors ...................................... 5-16

Safety Certification Label.................................................... 12-2

Seat Adjustment .................................................................. 2-19

Seat Belt Extender ............................................................... 2-38

Seat Belt Hanger .................................................................. 2-28

Seat Belt Inspection ............................................................ 2-29

Seat Belt Pretensioner System........................................... 2-39

Seat Belt Reminder.............................................................. 2-26

Seat Belts and Child Restraint Systems............................ 2-22

Selection of Coolant ............................................................ 9-17

Shoulder Anchor Height Adjuster...................................... 2-28

Side Air Bags and Side Curtain Air Bags .......................... 2-43

Side Door Locks .................................................................... 2-1

SLIP Indicator Light...................................................... 4-5, 6-13

Snow Tires............................................................................9-31

Spark Plugs ..........................................................................9-20

SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................14-1

Specified Fluid......................................................................9-16

Specified Gear Oil ................................................................9-14

Specified Oil .........................................................................9-11

Speedometer ........................................................................4-11

Spot Light ...............................................................................5-9

Stability Control System......................................................6-12

Starting the Engine ................................................................6-2

Steering Wheel .....................................................................9-23

Sun Visor ................................................................................ 5-8

Supplemental Restraint System (air bags) ........................2-40

Tachometer...........................................................................4-12

Tailgate..................................................................................2-14

Temperature Gauge .............................................................4-13

Theft Deterrent Light............................................................4-20

Thermometer ........................................................................4-17

Tilt Steering Lock Lever ........................................................3-8

Tire Chains..............................................................................7-3

Tire Changing Tool ..............................................................5-13

Tire Inflation Pressure .........................................................9-26

Tire Inspection......................................................................9-27

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .........................6-14

Tire Rotation .........................................................................9-29

Tire Sidewall Labeling .........................................................9-24

Tire Size ................................................................................ 9-25

Tires.......................................................................................9-24

Towing a Disabled Vehicle ..................................................10-4

Towing Your Vehicle (recreational towing) .........................8-2

15-5

INDEX

80J21-03E

Traction Control System..................................................... 6-12

Trailer Towing ........................................................................ 8-2

Trip meter ............................................................................. 4-11

Troubleshooting .................................................................. 4-57

Trunk Lid .............................................................................. 2-15

Trunk Light ........................................................................... 5-15

Turn Signal Indicators........................................................... 4-9

Turn Signal Operation ........................................................... 3-6

Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................................. 9-28

Using the 2WD/i-AWD (intelligent All Wheel Drive)

Switch ..................................................................................... 6-7

Using the Transaxle............................................................... 6-5

Vehicle Cleaning.................................................................. 11-3

Vehicle Identification Number ............................................ 12-1

Vehicle Loading ............................................................ 8-1, 9-33

Vehicle With Keyless Start System............................... 3-2, 6-3

Warning and Indicator Lights............................................... 4-3

Warranties ............................................................................ 12-2

Washing................................................................................ 11-4

Waxing .................................................................................. 11-5

Windows ............................................................................... 2-16

Windshield Washer................................................................ 3-7

Windshield Washer Fluid .................................................... 9-19

Windshield Wiper and Washer Lever................................... 3-6

Windshield Wipers................................................................. 3-6

Wiper Blades ........................................................................ 9-44

15-6

INDEX

80J21-03E

MEMO

80J21-03E

Prepared by

June, 2007

Part No. 99011-80J21-03E

Printed in Japan

TP274

Part No. 99011-80J21-03E

June, 2007

99011-80J21-03E

Printed in Japan

11.5 mm

ENGLISH

Suzuki Red: Magenta 100%, Yellow 100%

Suzuki Blue: Cyan 100%, Magenta 70%

OWNER’S MANUAL

Keep With Vehicle At All Times.

Contains Important Information

On Safety, Operation & Maintenance.

SX4

2008

Made from 100% recycled paper,

except for cover.

See page 1-1

SERVICE STATION INFORMATION

Fuel recommendation: Brake and clutch fluid:

Engine oil recommendation: Automatic transaxle fluid:

Tire cold pressure:

For further details, see “Engine Oil and Filter” in the

“INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE” section.

DOT3

An equivalent of DEXRON® -III.

See the “Tire Information Label” located on the

driver’s door lock pillar.

Engine oil with “Starburst” symbol

Suzuki 2008 Sx4 Owners Manual

SX4SX4 SEDAN to the manual 0373bb5f-c676-ca14-75bb-ffa42487426c

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation